diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-05 06:39:23 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-05 06:39:23 -0800 |
| commit | 959c897e6f667cabb23a67796de935b1b0dce3bd (patch) | |
| tree | 445dbdac6c162993a3e74fec9ed96dee767d85c4 /old/50983-0.txt | |
| parent | 4ed54b9843f05d7d5298c69cb7e9fc0faaaf6e93 (diff) | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old/50983-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50983-0.txt | 9287 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9287 deletions
diff --git a/old/50983-0.txt b/old/50983-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6a92c2a..0000000 --- a/old/50983-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9287 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook, Four Afoot, by Ralph Henry Barbour - - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - - -Title: Four Afoot - Being the Adventures of the Big Four on the Highway - - -Author: Ralph Henry Barbour - - - -Release Date: January 20, 2016 [eBook #50983] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - - -***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AFOOT*** - - -E-text prepared by Donald Cummings and the Online Distributed Proofreading -Team (http://www.pgdp.net) - - - -Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this - file which includes the original illustrations. - See 50983-h.htm or 50983-h.zip: - (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/50983/50983-h/50983-h.htm) - or - (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/50983/50983-h.zip) - - -Transcriber’s note: - - Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_). - - Text enclosed by equal signs is in bold face (=bold=). - - - - - -FOUR AFOOT - - - * * * * * * - -BY RALPH HENRY BARBOUR. - -Each Illustrated, 12mo, Cloth, $1.50. - - Double Play. - Forward Pass! - The Spirit of the School. - Four in Camp. - Four Afoot. - Four Afloat. - The Arrival of Jimpson. - Behind the Line. - Captain of the Crew. - For the Honor of the School. - The Half-Back. - On Your Mark. - Weatherby’s Inning. - -D. APPLETON & COMPANY, NEW YORK. - - * * * * * * - - -[Illustration: “Swinging along a country road on Long Island.”] - - -FOUR AFOOT - -Being the Adventures of the Big Four on the Highway - -by - -RALPH HENRY BARBOUR - -Author of “The Half-Back,” “Behind the Line,” -“Weatherby’s Inning,” “On Your Mark,” -“Four in Camp,” etc. - - - - - - - -[Illustration] - -New York and London -D. Appleton and Company -1910 - -Copyright, 1906, by -D. Appleton and Company - -Published September, 1906 - - - - - To L. S. S. - - IN MEMORY OF PLEASANT HOURS - - - - -TO THE READER - - -Many of you who followed the adventures of Nelson, Dan, Bob, and -Tom, as narrated in a previous story, FOUR IN CAMP, have very kindly -professed a willingness to hear more about this quartette of everyday -boys, and the author, who has himself grown rather fond of the “Big -Four,” was very well pleased to take them again for his heroes. -It seems now as though there might even be a third volume to the -series--but that will depend altogether on how well you like this one, -for, as of course you understand, the author is writing in an effort to -please you, and not himself. And if he doesn’t please you, he would be -very glad to have you tell him so, and why. - -If you go to searching your map of Long Island for the places mentioned -in this story you will be disappointed. They are all there, but, with -one or two exceptions, under other names. You see, it doesn’t do to be -too explicit in a case of this sort. Mr. William Hooper, for instance, -might seriously object were you to stop in front of his house and -remark, “Huh! there’s where old Bill Hooper lives, the fellow that -wouldn’t give the ‘four’ any supper!” Of course it is different in the -case of Sag Harbor--that town has already been immortalized on the -stage, and is probably by this time quite hardened to publicity. And as -for Jericho--but then they never got there! - - RALPH HENRY BARBOUR. - CAMBRIDGE, MASS. - - - - -CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I.--IN WHICH THE BIG FOUR SET OUT FOR JERICHO 1 - - II.--IN WHICH TOMMY DELAYS PROGRESS AND THEY LOSE - THEIR WAY 13 - - III.--INTRODUCES MR. JERRY HINKLEY AND AN IMPROMPTU - DINNER 24 - - IV.--INTRODUCES MR. WILLIAM HOOPER AND AN IMPROMPTU - SUPPER 37 - - V.--DESCRIBES A SECOND ENCOUNTER WITH MR. WADE 45 - - VI.--WITNESSES A RESCUE AND AN ADDITION TO THE PARTY 57 - - VII.--WHEREIN BARRY DISTINGUISHES HIMSELF 67 - - VIII.--IN WHICH POVERTY CLAIMS THE FOUR 77 - - IX.--SHOWS THEM BOTH HUNGRY AND SATISFIED 88 - - X.--IN WHICH NELSON SEES STRANGE VISIONS 98 - - XI.--IN WHICH JERRY TELLS HIS STORY AND DAN PROVIDES - DINNER 112 - - XII.--WITNESSES THE FIRST APPEARANCE OF “DANELLO” 128 - - XIII.--WHEREIN THEY MEET THE WILD MAN OF THE TARTARY - STEPPES 137 - - XIV.--TOM SWIMS IN THE OCEAN AND DIPS INTO POETRY 151 - - XV.--TELLS HOW THEY MEET THE MANNIG BASEBALL CLUB AND - HOW NELSON AND BOB GET ENGAGEMENTS 170 - - XVI.--WHEREIN NELSON AND BOB PLAY BALL AND LAURELVILLE - MAKES A PROTEST 184 - - XVII.--IN WHICH A FIRE ALARM AIDS MANNIG, AND THE FOUR - LEAVE HURRIEDLY 201 - - XVIII.--TELLS OF AN ADVENTURE IN A HUT 218 - - XIX.--TELLS OF A VOYAGE AND A SHIPWRECK 230 - - XX.--FOLLOWS WITH A RESCUE AND INTRODUCES FRIENDS IN - NEED 246 - - XXI.--WHEREIN TOM LOSES HIS TOOTHBRUSH AND DAN TELLS - A STORY 261 - - XXII.--WHEREIN GOOD-BYS ARE SAID AND BARRY MAKES HIS - CHOICE 271 - - - - -LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - - - FACING - PAGE - - “Swinging along a country road on Long Island.” _Frontispiece_ - - “Leaped excitedly at the counter.” 74 - - “‘Why! Hello, Jerry Hinkley!’” 104 - - “Suddenly the boat’s head swirled around.” 242 - - - - -FOUR AFOOT - - - - -CHAPTER I - -IN WHICH THE BIG FOUR SET OUT FOR JERICHO - - -“On to Jericho!” - -Dan Speede took the car steps at a bound and was out on the station -platform looking eagerly about him before the other three boys had -struggled through the car door. Swinging his pack to his shoulders, he -waved an imaginary sword about his head and struck an attitude in which -his right hand pointed determinedly toward the country road. - -“Forward, brave comrades!” he shouted. - -The brave comrades, tumbling down the steps, cheered enthusiastically, -while the occupants of the car in which the quartet had traveled from -Long Island City looked wonderingly out upon them. But as the present -conduct of the boys was only on a par with what had gone before, the -passengers soon settled back into their seats, and the train puffed on -its way. Tom Ferris waved gayly to the occupants of the passing windows -and then followed the others along the platform. The station was a -small one, and save for a farmer who was loading empty milk cans into a -wagon far down the track, there was no one in sight. - -“Which way do we go?” asked Nelson Tilford. - -For answer Bob Hethington produced his “Sectional Road Map of Long -Island, Showing the Good Roads, with Description of Scenery, Routes, -etc.,” and spread it out against the side of the station. - -“Here we are,” he said. “Locust Park. And here’s our road.” - -“That’s all right,” answered Nelson, following the other’s finger. “I -see the road on your old map, but where is it on the landscape?” - -“Why, down there somewhere. It crosses the track just beyond the -station.” - -“Certainly, but you don’t happen to see it anywhere, do you?” asked Dan. - -Bob had to acknowledge that he didn’t. - -“Come on; we’ll ask Mr. Farmer down here,” said Tom. - -So they went on down the track to the little platform from which the -milk was loaded on to the cars and hailed the farmer. - -“Good morning,” said Dan. “Which is the road to Jericho, please?” - -The farmer paused in his task and looked them over speculatively. -Finally, - -“Want to go to Jericho, do you?” he asked. - -“Yes,” answered Dan. - -“Are you in a hurry?” - -“Why--no, I don’t suppose so. Why?” - -“’Cause there’s a train in about an hour that’ll take you to -Hicksville, and it’s about two miles from there by the road.” - -“But we just got off the train,” objected Nelson. - -“So I seen,” was the calm response. “Why didn’t you stay on? Didn’t you -have no money?” - -“Yes, but we wanted to walk,” answered Bob. “Which way do we go?” - -“Want to walk, eh? Well, you won’t have no trouble, I guess. Pretty -fair walkers, are you?” - -“Bully!” answered Dan. - -“Fond of exercise, I guess?” - -“Love it!” - -“That so? Well, there’s lots of good walkin’ around here; the roads is -full of it.” - -“Oh, come on,” said Tom impatiently. “He’s plumb crazy!” - -“Hold on,” interposed the farmer. “I’m tellin’ you just as fast as I -know how, ain’t I?” - -“Maybe,” answered Dan politely, “but you see we sort of want to get to -Jericho before Sunday. And as it’s already Monday morning----” - -“Thought you said you weren’t in no hurry,” objected the farmer. - -“Well, if you call that being in a hurry,” Dan replied, “I guess we -lied to you. If you happen to have any idea where the Jericho road -is----” - -“Well, I’d oughter, seems to me. I live on it. Are you all going?” - -“Every last one of us,” answered Nelson. - -“Tell him how old we are and the family history and let’s get on,” -suggested Dan _sotto voce_. - -“Well, there’s four of you, eh?” - -“I think so.” Bob made pretense of counting the assembly with much -difficulty. “Stand still, Tom, till I count you. Yes, sir, that’s -right; there are four of us.” - -“Well, two of you could sit on the seat with me and two of you could -kind of hang out behind, I guess.” - -“Oh, much obliged,” said Bob. “But really we’d rather walk. We’re -taking a walking trip down the island.” - -“You don’t say! Well, you go back there about a half a mile and you’ll -find a road crossing the track. You take that until you fetch the -country road going to your right. Keep along that and it’s about nine -miles to Jericho.” - -“Thanks,” said Dan. - -“You’re welcome. That’s the best way if you’re real fond of walking.” - -“Oh,” said Bob suspiciously. “And supposing we aren’t?” - -“Then you’d better go the shorter way and save about two miles,” -answered the farmer gravely. - -“Which way’s that?” - -“Right down the track here for a quarter of a mile till you come to a -road going to the left. Take that for half a mile and then turn to your -right on the country road.” - -“Thanks again,” said Bob. “You’ve had a whole lot of fun with us, -haven’t you?” - -“Well, you’re sort of amusin’,” answered the farmer with a twinkle in -his eye. “But I been more entertained at the circus.” - -Bob smiled in spite of himself, and the others grinned also; all save -Tom. - -“B-b-b-blamed old ha-ha-hayseed!” growled Tom. “Hope he ch-ch-ch-chokes!” - -The four took their way down the track, Bob highly pleased to find the -truthfulness of his map established; although Dan declared that a map -that would lie nearly a quarter of a mile couldn’t be fairly called -truthful. When they had gone a hundred yards or so the farmer hailed -them. - -“What is it?” shouted Bob. - -“Got friends in Jericho, have you?” called the farmer. - -“No,” answered Bob, adding “confound you” under his breath. - -“Going to take dinner there, be you?” - -“I guess so. Why?” - -“Well, you go to William Hooper’s place about a mile t’other side of -the village, and say Abner Wade sent you. He’ll look after you, William -will.” - -“Thank you,” called Bob. - -“He seems to be a decent chap after all,” said Nelson. - -“The only trouble with him is that he’s like Dan,” answered Bob. “He’s -got an overdeveloped sense of humor.” - -They tramped on, and presently found the road that crossed the railway. -Turning into this they struck due north; at least that’s what Tom -declared after consulting the compass which he carried in his pocket. -Bob looked at his watch. - -“Nine-fifteen,” he announced. “We’ve got lots of time. Seven miles in -three hours is too easy.” - -“If that old codger told us the right way,” amended Tom. - -“He did, because the map shows it,” responded Bob. - -“Don’t talk to us about that old map,” said Dan. “It’s an awful liar, -Bob.” - -And while they are quarreling good-naturedly about it let us have a -look at them. - -The boy walking ahead, swinging that stick he has cut from a willow -tree, is Nelson Tilford. Nelson--sometimes “Nels” to his friends--lives -in Boston within sight of the golden dome and is a student at Hillton -Academy; and next year he expects, if all goes well, to be a freshman -at Erskine College. That apparent slimness is a bit misleading, for -the muscles under the gray flannel suit are hard as iron, and what -Nelson lacks in breadth and stature is quite made up in strength and -agility. In the same way the quiet, thoughtful expression on his face -doesn’t tell all the truth. Nelson is a good student, fond of books and -inclined to think matters out for himself, but at the same time he is -fond of sports and has been known to get into mischief. - -Next to him walks Tom--familiarly “Tommy”--Ferris; residence, Chicago; -age, fourteen years--almost fifteen now. Tom is inclined toward -stoutness, has light hair and gray eyes, is at once good-natured -and lazy, and has a positive talent for getting into trouble. Tommy -expresses himself clearly until he becomes excited; then he stutters -ludicrously. Tommy is also a Hillton boy, but is one class behind -Nelson, a fact which troubles him a good deal, since he wants very much -to go up to college with his friend. - -The big, broad-shouldered boy with the red hair and rollicking blue -eyes is Dan Speede. Dan, who hails from New York, is fifteen years -old. Whereas Tom spends a good deal of his time getting into trouble -himself, Dan is tireless in his efforts to get others into trouble; -and he usually succeeds. For the rest, he is fond of fun, afraid of -nothing, and hasn’t an ounce of meanness in him. Dan is in his senior -year at St. Eustace Academy, and he, too, has his heart set on Erskine -College. - -The last boy of the four--and the eldest--is Bob Hethington, of -Portland, Maine. Bob is sixteen--nearly seventeen--and is big, -quiet-appearing, and unexcitable. He has curly black hair and eyes and -is distinctly good-looking. Bob, too, is booked for Erskine. - -Perhaps you have met these boys before, when, at Camp Chicora, -last summer, they gained the title of the Big Four. If so, you are -undoubtedly wondering how it happens that we find them on this bright -morning in early September swinging along a country road on Long -Island. Well, it was all Dan’s fault. Dan took it into his head to get -sick in early summer. As he had never been sick before to amount to -anything, he thought he might as well do the thing right. So he had -typhoid fever. That was in June, just after school closed, and he spent -the succeeding two months at home. He didn’t have a good time, and even -when the doctor declared him well, Dan felt, as he himself expressed -it, like a last summer’s straw hat. So there was a family council. -Dan’s mother said Dan ought to stay out of school and go abroad. Dan -said, “Nonsense.” So the matter was left to the physician. He said what -Dan needed was outdoor exercise, plenty of fresh air, and all that. - -“Let him get into an old suit of clothes,” said the doctor, “and -take a walking trip.” (You see, the doctor was a bit old-fashioned.) -“Nothing like walking; sea trips and sanitariums aren’t half as good. -He needn’t hurry; just let him wander around country for two or three -weeks; that’ll set him up, you see if it doesn’t.” - -Dan liked the idea, but the thought of wandering around the country -alone didn’t appeal to him. “If I could only get Nelson or Bob or Tommy -to go along,” he said. - -“Perhaps you can,” said his father. - -So three letters were written and dispatched and soon three answers -came. Nelson was glad to go, Bob was equally willing, and Tom was -“tickled to death.” Bob and Nelson had been at Camp Chicora most of -the summer, while Tom had spent his vacation at one of the Michigan -lake resorts. The last week in August there was a jolly gathering of -the clans at Dan’s house, a happy reunion, and an excited discussion -of ways and means. Mr. Speede engineered affairs, and by the fourth -day of September all was ready. There had been much discussion as to -where they should go. Nelson recommended his own State, Bob thought -Pennsylvania about right, and Tom favored the Adirondacks. It was Dan’s -father who thought of Long Island. - -“In the first place,” he pointed out, “it’s right at our back door, -and you won’t have to waste a day in getting there; and as you’ve -got only three weeks at the most before school begins, that’s worth -considering. Then, too, if anything should happen to you, I could -get you here in a few hours. Long Island isn’t the biggest stretch of -country in the world, but there’s over a hundred miles of it as to -length, and I guess you can keep busy. Besides, the towns are near -together and you’ll be able to find good sleeping accommodations; and -I’d rather Dan didn’t do too much sleeping out of doors just at first.” - -So the map of Long Island was produced and studied, and the more they -studied it the better they liked it. It was unknown territory to them -all, for even Dan’s knowledge of the place was limited to Coney Island, -and the names of places--names which amused Tommy vastly--and the -evident abundance of good roads won the day. - -“Me for Long Island!” declared Nelson. - -“Same here,” said Tommy. “I want to go to Jericho.” - -“And I want to go to Yaphank,” declared Bob. - -“And Skookwams Neck for mine!” cried Dan. - -So they started to lay out a route. They laid out six. The first -left out Lake Ronkonkoma, and Tommy declared he just had to see Lake -Ronkonkoma. The second omitted Ketcaboneck, and Bob said he couldn’t -go back home without having seen Ketcaboneck. The third slighted -Aquebogue, and Nelson refused to go unless that charming place was on -the route. And so it went, with much laughter, until finally Mr. Speede -advised them to settle only on a place to start from, take the map -with them, and decide their itinerary as they went along. That pleased -even Tommy. - -“I shall visit Quogue if I have to go alone,” he said. - -What to take with them was a question which occasioned almost as -much discussion. Tommy had brought his trunk and wanted to take most -of its contents along. In the end Mr. Speede’s counsel prevailed -and each boy limited his luggage to the barest necessities. Light -rubber ponchos--squares with a hole cut in the middle which could be -slipped over the head when it rained--were purchased, and these were -to be used as knapsacks, the other articles being rolled up inside. -The other articles included a towel, bathing trunks, brush and comb, -toothbrush, extra shoe laces, a light-weight flannel shirt, three -pairs of stockings, and handkerchiefs. Each boy carried a collapsible -drinking cup in his pocket, Bob took charge of the map, and Tom was the -proud possessor of a compass. Tom also carried a folding camera, having -at length been prevailed upon to leave a choice library of fiction, a -single-barreled shotgun, and two suits of clothing behind him. - -Old clothes, stout shoes, cloth caps, and light flannel shirts with -collars was the general attire. And so clothed, each with his pack in -hand, the four said good-by to Mr. and Mrs. Speede on Monday morning, -took car to the ferry, crossed the river, and boarded an early train -for Locust Park, at which point their journey on foot was to begin. -And so we find them, Dan a trifle pale of face but as merry and happy -as any, trudging along the road toward Jericho, each prepared for a -good time and eager for adventures. - -And adventures were awaiting them. - - - - -CHAPTER II - -IN WHICH TOMMY DELAYS PROGRESS AND THEY LOSE THEIR WAY - - -It was a fresh, cool morning, with a southerly breeze blowing up from -the ocean and rustling the leaves of the willows and maples along the -meadow walls. Big fleecy clouds sailed slowly across a blue September -sky, hundreds of birds flitted about the way and made the journey -musical, and life was well worth living. Not until they had turned into -the country road, a level, well-kept thoroughfare, did they catch a -glimpse of any habitation. Then a comfortable-looking farmhouse with -its accompanying barns and stables came into view. - -“Let’s go in and get a drink of water,” suggested Tom. - -No one else, however, was thirsty, and so Tom passed in through the -big gate alone while the others made themselves comfortable on the top -of the wall. Tom was gone a long time, but finally, just when Dan was -starting off to find him, he came into sight. - -“What’s he got?” asked Nelson. - -“Looks as though he was eating something,” answered Dan. “By Jupiter, -it’s pie!” - -“You fellows missed it,” called Tom, smiling broadly. “She gave me a -piece of apple pie and it was great.” - -“Doesn’t look like apple,” said Bob. - -“Oh, this is squash. The first piece was apple,” was the cheerful reply. - -“Well, of all pigs!” said Nelson. “How many pieces did you have?” - -“Only two,” was the unruffled response. “And a glass of milk.” - -Nelson looked his disgust, but Dan, reaching forward, sent the -half-consumed wedge of pastry into the dust. - -“Hope you ch-ch-choke!” said Tommy warmly, viewing his prize ruefully. -“It was gu-gu-gu-good pie, too!” - -But he got no sympathy from his laughing companions. Bob declared that -it served him jolly well right. - -“He’ll wish he hadn’t eaten any before he gets to the end of the day’s -journey,” said Dan. “We’ve got six miles and more to Jericho, and I -guess we’d better be doing ’em.” - -So they took up the march again. Everyone was in high feather. Side -excursions into adjoining fields were made, Dan went a hundred yards -out of his way to shy a stone at a noisy frog, and Nelson climbed a -cedar tree to its topmost branches merely because Bob hazarded the -opinion that cedar trees were hard to shin up. Only Tommy seemed to -experience none of the intoxication of the highway and the morning air. -Tommy appeared a bit sluggish, and kept dropping back, necessitating -frequent halts. - -“Look here, Tommy,” said Dan presently, “we’re awfully fond of you, but -we love honor more; also dinner. If you really want to spend the day -around here studying nature, why just say so; we’ll wait for you at -Jericho.” - -Whereupon Tom gave a grunt and moved faster. But at the end of half an -hour the truth was out; Tommy didn’t feel just right. - -“Where do you hurt?” asked Bob skeptically. - -“I--I have a beast of a pain in my chest,” said Tom, leaning against a -fence and laying one hand pathetically halfway down the front of his -flannel shirt. The others howled gleefully. - -“On his chest!” shrieked Dan. - -“Sure it isn’t a headache?” laughed Nelson. - -Tom looked aggrieved. - -“I gu-gu-gu-guess if you fu-fu-fu-fellows had it you wu-wu-wu-wu-wu----” - -“Look here, Tommy,” said Bob, “you haven’t got a pain; you’ve just -swallowed an alarm clock!” - -“That’s what you get for eating all that pie and making a hog of -yourself,” said Dan sternly. - -“It’s Tommy’s tummy,” murmured Nelson. - -Whatever it was, it undoubtedly hurt, for Tommy was soon doubled up on -the grass groaning dolefully. The others, exchanging comical glances, -made themselves comfortable alongside. - -“Got anything in your medicine chest that will help him, Dan?” asked -Nelson. Dan shook his head. The medicine chest consisted of a two-ounce -bottle of camphor liniment and a similar sized flask of witch-hazel. - -“How you feeling now, Tommy?” asked Bob gravely. - -“Better,” muttered Tom. “I’d ju-ju-ju-just like to know what that woman -put in her pu-pu-pu-pie!” - -“You don’t suppose it was poison, do you?” asked Dan, with a wink at -the others. - -Tom’s head came up like a shot and he stared wildly about him. - -“I bu-bu-bu-bet it wa-wa-wa-was!” he shrieked. “It fu-fu-feels like it! -A-a-a-a-arsenic!” - -“That’s mean, Dan,” said Bob. “He’s only fooling, Tommy. You have just -got a plain, everyday tummyache. Lie still a bit and you’ll be all -right.” - -Tom looked from one to the other in deep mistrust. - -“If I du-du-du-die,” he wailed, “I--I----” - -He broke off to groan and wriggle uneasily. - -“What, Tommy?” asked Dan with a grin. - -“I--I hope you all ch-ch-ch-ch-choke!” - -Tom’s pain in his “chest” kept them there the better part of two hours, -and it was past eleven when the invalid pronounced himself able to -continue the journey. There was still some four miles to go in order -to reach Jericho, which hamlet they had settled upon as their dinner -stop, and they struck out briskly. - -“What was that chap’s name?” asked Dan. “The one we were to get dinner -from.” - -“Hooper,” answered Bob, “William Hooper. I wish I was there now. I’m as -hungry as a bear.” - -There was a groan from Tom. - -“That’s all right, Tommy, but we haven’t feasted on nice apple and -squash pie, you see.” - -“Shut up!” begged Tom. - -“How big’s this Jericho place?” asked Nelson. - -Out came Bob’s road map. - -“Seems to be about three houses there according to this,” answered Bob. - -“Gee! I hope we don’t get by without seeing it,” said Dan. “Do you -suppose there’s a sign on it?” - -“I don’t know, but I’ve heard there was a tree opposite it,” Bob -replied gravely. “And there’s something else here too,” he continued, -still studying the map. “It’s a long, black thing; looks as though it -might be a skating rink or a ropewalk.” - -“Maybe it’s the poorhouse,” suggested Dan, looking over his shoulder. - -“Or a hospital for Tommy,” added Nelson. - -“Anyhow, I hope there’s something to eat there,” said Bob. - -“Me too,” sighed Nelson. “This is the longest old seven miles I ever -saw. And it’s after twelve o’clock. Sure we’re on the right road, Bob?” - -“Of course. Look at the map.” - -“Oh, hang the map! Let’s ask some one.” - -“All right. It does seem a good ways. We’ll ask the next person we see.” - -But although they had met half a dozen persons up to that time, it -seemed now that the district had suddenly become depopulated. Nelson -said he guessed they were all at home eating dinner. After another half -hour of steady walking, during which time Tom recovered his spirits, -they came into sight of a little village set along the road. There was -one store there and some five or six houses. - -“Anyhow,” said Dan hopefully, “we can get some crackers and cheese in -the store.” - -But when they had piled through the door they changed their minds. -It was a hardware store! A little old man with a bald head and -brass-rimmed spectacles limped down behind the counter to meet them. - -“Is this Jericho?” asked Bob. - -“Jericho? No, this ain’t Jericho,” was the answer. - -“Oh! Er--what is it?” - -“Bakerville.” - -“Where’s Bakerville?” - -“Right here.” - -“I know, but--well, where’s Jericho?” - -“’Bout eight miles from here.” - -Four boys groaned in unison. Bob pulled out his map, in spite of the -fact that Dan looked as though he was ready to seize upon and destroy -it. - -“That’s right,” said Bob sadly. “We got too far north.” - -“I should say we did!” snorted Dan. “About eight miles!” - -“But I don’t see how we managed to get off the right road,” said Bob. - -“I do,” answered Nelson. “Don’t you remember when Tom was laid out? -There were two roads there just beyond. We must have taken the wrong -one.” - -“That’s so,” said Tom; “I remember.” - -“Lots of good your remembering does now,” grunted Nelson. “If you -hadn’t got to fussing with those pies----!” - -“Thought you was in Jericho, did yer?” asked the shopkeeper with a -chuckle. They nodded soberly. “Well, well, that’s a good joke, ain’t -it?” - -“Swell!” muttered Dan. - -Tom grunted something about choking. - -“Is there any place here where we can get something to eat?” asked Bob. - -“I guess not, but there’s a hotel about a mile along. I guess you can -get something there.” - -So they prevailed on him to go to the door with them and point out the -way. - -“It’s on your way to Jericho,” said the storekeeper, pointing out the -road. “You turn down that first road there and then bear to the left -until you come to a big white farmhouse. Then you turn to the right -and keep on about half a mile, or maybe a mile, and the Center House -is just a little beyond. It’s a brown house with lots of windows and a -barn.” - -“Can’t help finding it,” muttered Dan sarcastically. - -They were rather quiet as they passed through the village and took the -turn indicated. From one house came an enticing odor of onions, and Dan -leaned up against a telephone pole and pretended to weep. That mile was -as long as two, but in the end they came into sight of the “brown house -with lots of windows and a barn.” But it didn’t look very hospitable. -The windows were closed and shuttered, and the barn appeared to be in -the last stages of decay. With sinking hearts they climbed the steps -and beat a tattoo on the front door. All was silence. - -“Empty!” groaned Nelson. - -“Nothing doing!” murmured Dan. - -“Hit it again,” counseled Tommy. - -They all took a hand at beating on that door, but it didn’t do the -least bit of good. The place was empty and closed up. Nelson sat down -on the top step and stared sadly across the country road. Tom joined -him. - -“Wish I had some more of that pie,” he muttered. - -Bob produced the map, which was already getting frayed at the corners, -and opened it out. - -“The best thing to do,” he said, “is to keep on till we find a -farmhouse or something, and beg some food.” - -“I could eat raw dog,” said Dan. “Any houses in sight on that lying map -of yours?” - -“Sure.” - -“How many miles off?” - -“About--er--about two or three, I should say.” - -“Can’t be done,” said Dan decidedly. “I couldn’t walk two miles if -there was a thousand dollars at the end of it.” - -“I could do it if there was a ham sandwich at the end of it,” said -Nelson. - -“Hunger has driven him daffy,” explained Dan sadly. - -“Well, there’s no use staying here,” said Bob impatiently. - -“Oh, I don’t know. Might as well die here as anywhere,” answered Nelson. - -“Wasn’t it your father, Dan, who said the beauty about Long Island was -that the towns were near together and we could get good accommodations -easily?” asked Tom. - -Dan made no answer. - -Suddenly a noise startled them. At the end of the porch stood a boy -of sixteen in an old blue shirt and faded overalls. He was plainly -surprised to see them, and stood looking at them for several seconds -before he spoke. Finally, - -“Hello!” he said. - -“Greetings,” answered Dan. “Will you kindly send the head waiter to us?” - -“Huh?” asked the youth. - -“Well, never mind then. Just show us to our rooms. We’ll have a light -lunch sent up and keep our appetites for dinner.” - -“Is the hotel closed?” interrupted Bob. The youth nodded. - -“Yep. They didn’t make no money last summer, so they didn’t open it -this year. Did you knock?” - -“Oh, no, we didn’t exactly knock,” answered Dan. “We only kind of -tapped weakly.” - -“Want anything?” - -“Yes, a man at Bakerville said we could get some dinner here. I don’t -suppose we can, though,” added Bob sadly. The other shook his head -slowly. - -“Guess not,” he said. “There’s a hotel at Minton Hill, though. There’s -lots of summer folks there.” - -“How far’s that?” - -“Not more’n six miles.” - -The four groaned in unison. - -“We haven’t had anything since seven o’clock,” said Nelson. - -“You ain’t?” The youth became instantly sympathetic. “Well, ain’t that -too bad?” - -The question scarcely seemed to demand an answer and so received none. -The youth in the overalls frowned deeply. - -“Well, now, look here,” he said finally. “Me an’ dad lives back here in -the barn and looks after the farm. We ain’t got much, but if some bread -and butter and milk will do, why, I guess----” - -The four threw themselves upon him as one man. - -“Bread!” shouted Dan. - -“Butter!” cried Nelson. - -“Milk!” gurgled Tommy. - -“Lead the way!” said Bob. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -INTRODUCES MR. JERRY HINKLEY AND AN IMPROMPTU DINNER - - -That was a strange meal and an enjoyable one. The menu wasn’t -elaborate, but their appetites were, and not one of the four was -inclined to be critical. What had formerly been the carriage house had -been fitted up with a couple of cot beds, some chairs, a stove, and a -table, into an airy, if not very well-appointed, apartment. The boy in -overalls, whose name during the subsequent conversation transpired to -be Jerry Hinkley, produced a loaf of bread and a pat of butter from a -box, and then disappeared for a minute. When he returned he brought a -battered tin can half full of milk. Eating utensils were scarce, and -the boys had to take turns with the two knives and the two thick china -cups. The table boasted no cloth, and Tom had to sit on an empty box, -but those were mere details. - -“I looked to see if I could find a few eggs,” said Jerry, as he poured -out the milk, “but we ain’t got but eight hens and they ain’t been -layin’ much lately.” - -“This will do finely,” mumbled Dan, with his mouth full of bread and -butter. - -“It’s swell,” said Tom from behind his cup. - -The doors were wide open, and the September sunlight streamed in over -the dusty floor. A bedraggled rooster, followed cautiously by a trio -of dejected-looking hens, approached and observed the banquet from the -doorsill, clucking suspiciously. Jerry sat on the edge of one of the -cots and watched proceedings with interest. But he seemed uneasy, and -once or twice he started up only to change his mind with a troubled -frown and return to his seat. Finally he asked awkwardly: - -“Say, was you fellows meanin’ to pay anything for your food?” - -“Of course,” Bob assured him. “You don’t think we’re going to let you -feed us for nothing?” - -“That’s all right, then,” said Jerry, looking vastly relieved. “We got -some bacon and if you say so I’ll fry you some in a jiffy.” - -The boys howled approval. - -“You see,” continued Jerry, “I was most skeered to give you bacon -’cause dad would have missed it when he got back. Dad ain’t got -much money, an’ I guess he wouldn’t like me to be too free with the -victuals. But if you’re willin’ to pay----” - -“Sure, we’ll pay,” said Bob. - -So Jerry set a frying pan on top of the stove, touched a match to the -pile of straw and corncobs inside, and produced a strip of bacon from -the larder. Even Bob, who prided himself on his culinary abilities, had -to pay tribute to Jerry’s deftness. In ten minutes the first panful of -crisp bacon was ready and a second lot was sizzling on the stove. - -“Talk about your reed birds!” said Dan eloquently. - -“Never tasted anything better in my life,” said Nelson. “Is there any -more milk there?” - -Ten minutes later the banquet was a thing of the past, and the four sat -back and sighed luxuriously. - -“That was sure fine,” said Dan. “My, but I was hungry!” - -“Me too,” answered Nelson. “But look here, how about you?” He looked -inquiringly at Jerry. “We haven’t left you a thing.” - -“Oh, I had my dinner at twelve,” answered their host, as he cleared the -table. “You see we have our breakfast about six, dad an’ me.” - -“You say your father’s away to-day?” asked Bob. - -“Yes, gone over to Roslyn to buy some feed for the horse.” - -“And you live here all the year, do you?” - -“We only come here last April. We used to have a farm down near -Hicksville, but we lost it.” - -“That’s too bad. Is there just you and your father?” - -Jerry nodded soberly. - -“Mother died year ago last May. Me an’ dad’s been kind of helpless -since then. Things don’t seem to go just right nowadays.” - -“Do you go to school?” asked Nelson. - -“No. I did one year over to Newton. It was a mighty nice school too. -There was three teachers. I learnt a whole lot that winter. I been -intendin’ to go again, but since mother died----” - -Jerry’s voice dwindled away into silence while he stared out into the -sunlit stable yard. - -“I see,” said Bob sympathetically. - -“Mother she taught me a lot at home when I was just a kid,” resumed -Jerry. “Spellin’, ’rithmetic, and all about Scotland. She was born in -Scotland, you see. I guess I know more’n most fellers about Scotland,” -he added proudly. - -“I bet you know a heap more about it than I do,” said Bob. - -“I guess you’re through school, ain’t you?” asked Jerry. - -“I get through this year,” answered Bob. “Then I’m going to college.” - -Jerry’s eyes brightened. - -“Is that so?” he asked eagerly. “I guess you’re pretty smart. What -college are you going to?” - -“Erskine. Ever hear of it?” - -“No.” Jerry shook his head apologetically. “You see I don’t know much -about colleges. I--I’d like to see one. I guess Yale must be pretty -fine. I expect it’s bigger’n that boardin’ school over to Garden City?” - -“St. Paul’s? Some bigger, yes.” - -“Is the school you been going to like St. Paul’s?” - -“Not much, but Nelson and Tommy here go to a school a good deal the -same. Hillton. Ever hear of Hillton?” - -Again Jerry shook his head. - -“What’s it like, your school?” he asked. - -For the next quarter of an hour Nelson told about Hillton--Tom -interpolating explanatory footnotes, as it were--and Jerry listened -with shining eyes and open mouth. It was all very wonderful to him, -and he asked question after question. Dan tried to tell him that while -Hillton was good enough in a way, the only school worth boasting about -was St. Eustace. But Tom tipped him out of his chair, and as it is -difficult to uphold the honor of your school with any eloquence from -the hard floor of a carriage house, Dan decided to shut up. - -“I guess it costs a good deal to go to a school like that,” said Jerry -regretfully. - -“Not so awful much,” answered Nelson. “A fellow can get through the -year on three hundred.” - -Jerry nodded gravely. - -“I guess that’s kind of reasonable, ain’t it?” - -“Yes. Then if a fellow is lucky enough to get a scholarship, it brings -it down to about two hundred, maybe.” - -“What’s a scholarship like?” asked Jerry interestedly. - -Nelson explained. - -“I guess it’s pretty hard to get into one of them schools, ain’t it?” -pursued Jerry. - -“Oh, not so very hard.” - -“Think I could do it?” - -“Well--I don’t know. I think maybe you could if you had some coaching.” - -“What’s that like?” asked Jerry. - -Nelson glanced appealingly at Bob, and the latter took up the task. -Half an hour later the four decided that it was time for them to be -going. Bob broached the matter of payment. - -“How much do we owe, Jerry?” - -“I guess about a quarter,” answered Jerry. - -“A quarter!” cried Tom. “Get out! That was worth a dollar! It saved my -life.” - -“It’s worth fifty cents, anyhow,” said Nelson, “and here’s mine.” - -“Well,” said Jerry accepting the coin reluctantly, “but I don’t feel -just right about it. You see, the milk don’t cost nothin’, and the -butter don’t cost nothin’, and the bread was only five cents, and----” - -“That bread was worth more than five cents to us,” laughed Dan. “Here, -take the money, and don’t be silly.” Dan held out his half dollar, and -Bob and Tom followed suit. Jerry looked bewildered. - -“What’s that?” he asked. - -“We’re going to pay fifty cents,” said Dan. - -“Yes, but he paid it,” replied Jerry, pointing his thumb at Nelson. - -“He paid for himself, that’s all.” - -“Gosh! I didn’t mean you was to pay fifty cents apiece!” cried Jerry. -“Fifty cents is more’n enough for the whole of you!” - -They laughed derisively, and tried to get him to accept the rest of the -money, but nothing they found to say had any effect. - -“I been paid enough,” said Jerry doggedly. “I’m much obliged, but -I can’t take no more. You didn’t eat more’n a quarter’s worth of -victuals.” - -In the end they had to let him have his own way. As they were fixing -their packs on to their shoulders Jerry approached Nelson. He held out -a soiled envelope and a stump of pencil. - -“Say, would you just write down the name of that school you was tellin’ -about?” he asked awkwardly. - -“Surely,” answered Nelson. - -“‘Hillton Academy, Hillton, New York,’” read Jerry unctuously. “Thanks. -I’m goin’ there some day.” - -“That’s fine,” answered Nelson heartily. “You’ll like it, I’m sure. -Maybe you can get up this year while I’m there. I wish you would. I’d -be glad to show you around.” - -“This year? No, I couldn’t do that. You see, I’ll have to earn some -money first; three hundred dollars, you said, didn’t you?” - -“Oh, you mean you’re going to enter?” asked Nelson. - -“Yes, I’m goin’ to school there. You see”--Jerry paused and looked -thoughtfully out into the afternoon sunlight--“you see, mother always -intended me to have an education, an’--an’ I’m agoin’ to have it!” he -added doggedly. “I’m goin’ to get out of here; there ain’t nothin’ -here; I’m goin’ to get a place on a farm and earn some money. I guess -one year there would help, wouldn’t it?” - -“Yes, it would,” answered Nelson earnestly. “And I dare say if you got -through one year, you’d find a way to get through the next. Lots of -fellows pretty near work their way through school. Look here, Jerry, -supposing I wanted to write to you, where could I direct a letter?” - -“Dad gets his mail at Bakerville. I guess if you wrote my name and his -name and sent it to Bakerville, I’d get it. I--I’d like first rate to -get a letter from you. I ain’t never got very many letters.” - -“Well, I’ll write you one,” said Nelson cheerfully. “I shall want to -know how you’re getting along, so you must answer it. Will you?” - -Jerry reddened under his tan. - -“I guess so,” he muttered. “But I ain’t much of a writer. You see, I -ain’t never seemed to have much time for writin’.” - -“Of course not! But don’t let that trouble you. All ready, you fellows? -Well, good-by, Jerry. We’re awfully much obliged to you. Hope we’ll see -you again. And don’t forget that you’re going to make some money and -enter Hillton.” - -Jerry shook hands embarrassedly with each of the four and followed them -down to the road. - -“Good-by,” he called. “I wish you’d all come again. You been good to -tell me about them schools. I--I had a mighty good time!” - -They walked on in silence for some distance. Then, when the corner of -the hotel had disappeared around a turn of the road, Tom broke out -explosively. - -“It’s a mu-mu-mu-mean sh-shame!” he said. - -“What is?” they asked in chorus. - -“Why, that fellow bu-bu-back there. He’d give his skin to gu-gu-gu-go -to school, and instead of that he’ll have to stay there in that -pu-pu-place all his life!” - -“That’s so, Tommy,” said Bob. “It is hard luck. And he’s a good fellow, -too, Jerry is. Take those overalls off him, and put some decent clothes -on him, and he’d be a good-looking chap.” - -“Yes, and he’s built well too,” added Dan. “He’d make the varsity -eleven first pop.” - -“He’s the sort of chap who’d be popular, I think,” said Nelson. “I -wish----” - -“What do you wish?” asked Dan. - -“I wish we could help him.” - -There was an instant’s silence. Then Tommy fell over a stone and began -to stutter violently. - -“Lu-lu-lu-lu-lu--” sputtered Tommy. - -“Easy there,” cautioned Dan. “You’ll blow up in a minute.” - -“Lu-lu-lu-lu-lu-lu----” - -“Shut up, you fellows,” said Dan indignantly, “and hear what he has to -say. It’s going to be great!” - -“Lu-lu-lu-let’s!” - -“Eh?” - -“How’s that, Tommy?” - -“Once more, please.” - -“Lu-lu-lu-let’s!” repeated Tom, very red of face. - -“Oh, of course!” - -“Twice that, Tommy!” - -“Let’s what?” - -“Lu-let’s help him!” - -“Oh! I’d forgotten what we were talking about,” said Dan. - -“Yes, that was about half a mile back,” said Bob. - -“Let’s see if we can’t make up enough to send him to Hillton for a -year,” went on Tommy. “He’d probably get a scholarship, and then if he -found some work there, he’d make out all right the next year.” - -“You’ve got a good heart, Tommy,” said Dan. “It’s a shame you don’t go -to a decent school.” - -Tom took no notice of the insult. - -“Couldn’t we, Bob?” he asked. - -“I don’t see how we could do it ourselves,” answered the older boy. -“But we might get some one interested in him.” - -“Three hundred isn’t awfully much,” said Nelson thoughtfully. “If we -got our folks to give a fourth----” - -“That’s it!” cried Tom. “My dad will give a fourth. Why, it would be -only seventy-five dollars!” - -“A mere nothing,” murmured Dan. “One moment, please, and I will draw -a check.” He flourished his hand through the air. “‘Pay to Jerry -seventy-five and no one-hundredths dollars. Daniel H. F. Speede.’ There -you are. Oh, not a word, I beg of you! It is nothing, nothing at all! A -mere trifle!” - -“And I think I can promise for my father,” Nelson was saying. “How -about you, Bob?” - -“I’ll ask. I think he will give it, although I can’t say sure. He’s had -hard luck lately.” - -“You’re in it, aren’t you, Dan?” - -“Not a cent will I allow my father to pay to send a chap to Hillton,” -answered Dan indignantly. “If he wants to go to St. Eustace, now, -why----” - -“But you see, Dan,” said Tom sweetly, “he wants an education.” - -Dan chased Tom down the road and administered proper punishment. When -order was restored the four discussed the matter seriously, and it was -decided that Jerry was to go to Hillton. - -“Of course,” said Nelson, “he couldn’t pass the entrance exams as he is -now, but if he has a year’s schooling this year he ought to make it all -right. And if he doesn’t have to work he can go to school. I suppose -there’s a decent school around here somewhere?” - -“Plenty of them,” answered Dan indignantly. - -“If he needs some coaching next summer,” said Tom, “I’ll see that he -gets it.” - -“You might coach him yourself, Tommy,” suggested Dan. - -“He said he was sixteen now,” pondered Bob. “That would make him -seventeen when he entered. Rather old for the junior class, eh?” - -“What of it?” asked Nelson. “I’ll see that he knows some good fellows, -and I don’t believe any chap’s going to make fun of him when they know -about him. Besides, maybe we can get him into the lower middle class.” - -“That’s so,” said Tom. “Anyway, I’ll bet he’s the sort that can learn -fast and remember things. Wish I could.” - -“Here’s a romantic-looking well,” said Dan, “and I’m thirsty. That -bacon was a trifle salt. Let’s go in and interview the old oaken -bucket.” - -The well stood in front of a little white house, and as they went up -the walk a woman put her head around the corner of the open door. Dan -doffed his cap gallantly. - -“May we borrow a drink of water?” he asked politely. - -The woman nodded and smiled, and Tom began winding the old-fashioned -windlass. When the bucket--which turned out to be tin instead of -oak--made its appearance the four dipped their cups. - -“Fellow tramps,” declaimed Dan, “let us drink a health to Jerry. May he -be a credit to Hillton!” - -“May our plans succeed,” added Nelson. - -“Here’s to Ju-ju-Jerry!” cried Tom. - -“To our _protégé_!” laughed Bob. - -“To our _protégé_!” they echoed, and drank merrily. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -INTRODUCES MR. WILLIAM HOOPER AND AN IMPROMPTU SUPPER - - -By the time they had regained the Jericho road they had walked nearly -twelve miles, and it was close to six o’clock. It had been slow going -for the last two hours, for the distance had begun to tell on them, -especially on Dan and Tom. Nelson and Bob, who had been at Camp Chicora -for ten weeks, were in pretty good training, but even they were tired. - -“Now what?” asked Dan, as they paused at the junction of the two roads. - -“Well, Jericho’s a good mile and a half back, according to the map,” -answered Bob. “Suppose we find Bill Hooper’s place and see if he will -give us some supper. After that we can go on to Jericho and find a -place to sleep.” - -“All right, but are you sure there’s a hotel at Jericho?” said Nelson. - -“No, but Bill will tell us, I guess.” - -“On to Bill’s!” said Dan wearily. - -So they turned to the right and made toward the nearest farmhouse, -a half mile distant. It proved on nearer acquaintance to be a -prosperous-looking, well-kept place, with acres and acres of land to -it and a big white house flanked by a much bigger red barn. They made -their way up a lane under the branches of spreading elm trees, and -knocked at the front door. Presently footsteps sounded inside and the -portal swung open, revealing a thickset elderly man, whose morose, -suspicious face was surrounded by a fringe of grizzled beard and -whiskers. - -“Well?” he demanded. - -“Good evening,” said Bob. “Could you let us have something to eat, sir? -We would be glad to pay for it.” - -“This isn’t a hotel,” said the man. - -“Oh, then you aren’t Mr. William Hooper?” - -“Yes, that’s me. Some one send you here?” - -“Yes, sir. We met a man down at Locust Park who said he was sure -you’d----” - -“What was his name?” - -“Er--what was it, Dan?” - -“Abner Wade,” answered Dan promptly. - -The name exerted a remarkable effect on Mr. William Hooper. His face -flushed darkly and his hands clinched. Bob fell back from the doorway -in alarm. - -“Abner Wade, eh?” growled Mr. Hooper. “Abner Wade sent ye, did he? I -might have known it was him! Now you make tracks, the whole parcel of -ye! If you ain’t outside my grounds in two minutes I’ll set the dog on -ye! Here, Brutus! Here, Brutus!” - -“_Et tu, Brute!_” muttered Dan as he fled down the path. - -At the gate they brought up, laughing, and looked warily back for the -dog. Much to their relief he wasn’t in sight. - -“Don’t believe he’s got any dog,” said Tommy. - -“Don’t see why he should have,” said Dan. “He’s ugly enough himself to -scare anyone away.” - -“I’d like to see that Abner Wade just about two minutes,” said Nelson. -“Nice game he put up on us!” - -“Yes. Old Bill hates him like poison, evidently,” answered Bob. “He’s -an awful joker, Abe is!” - -“What’ll we do?” asked Tom. - -“Foot it to Jericho, I guess,” said Bob. “It’s only about a mile.” - -Tom groaned dismally. - -“When I get back,” said Dan darkly, “I’ll bet I’ll tell that doctor of -mine what I think of his old walking!” - -“Here’s some one coming,” whispered Nelson. “Let’s light out.” - -“It’s a woman,” said Bob. “Guess it’s the old codger’s wife. Let’s -wait.” - -She was a stout, kind-faced woman, and her hurried walk from the house -had left her somewhat out of breath. - -“Boys,” she gasped, “I’m real sorry about this. And I guess you didn’t -mean any harm.” - -“Harm?” echoed Bob. “No’m, we just wanted some supper and were willing -to pay for it. A man down at Locust Park----” - -“Yes, I know. That was the trouble. You see, Abner Wade and my husband -ain’t been on speaking terms for ten years and more. Abner sold William -a horse that wasn’t just what he made it out to be; it died less’n -a week afterwards; and William went to law about it, and Abner kept -appealing or something, and it ain’t never come to a settlement, and -I guess it never will. If you hadn’t mentioned Abner Wade I guess it -would have been all right. I’m real sorry.” - -“Oh, it’s all right, ma’am,” Bob hastened to assure her. “I dare say we -can find something to eat at the hotel in Jericho.” - -“There isn’t any hotel there, far as I know,” said Mrs. Hooper, shaking -her head. - -Dan whistled softly, and even Bob looked discouraged. - -“I guess it’s the cold, cold ground for us to-night,” said Dan. “If I -only had a ham sandwich----!” - -Mrs. Hooper cast a glance up the lane. - -“Maybe you boys wouldn’t mind sleeping in the barn,” she suggested -doubtfully. - -“Indeed we wouldn’t,” said Bob. - -“That would be fun,” assented Nelson. - -“Anyway, I don’t see what better you can do,” said the woman. “It’s -a good five miles to Samoset, and I don’t know of any hotel nearer -than that. You go around here by that wall and cross over to the barn -back of the garden. You’ll find the little door at the side unlocked. -There’s plenty of hay there, and I guess you can be right comfortable. -As soon as I can I’ll bring you out some supper.” - -Tom let out a subdued whoop of joy, and Dan did a double shuffle in the -grass. - -“It’s mighty good of you,” said Bob warmly. - -“Yes’m; we’re awfully much obliged,” echoed Nelson. - -“We’ll be mighty glad to pay for it,” Dan chimed in. - -“Well, I guess there won’t be anything to pay,” said Mrs. Hooper with a -smile. “Now you run along, and I’ll come soon as I can. William’s kind -of worked up, and I guess he’d better not know about it. I want you to -promise me one thing, though.” - -“Yes’m. What is it?” asked Nelson. - -“Not to light any matches.” - -“Yes, we promise.” - -“All right. Run along now, and keep out of sight.” Mrs. Hooper nodded -good-naturedly, and turned back toward the house. Dan struck a dramatic -attitude. - -“Supper!” he cried. - -“Shut up, and come along,” said Bob. - -“Well,” said Dan, “I guess here’s where we get the laugh on Abe. -Only--well, if I ever have a chance to square things with him----!” - -Words failed him, and with a sigh he followed the others down the road -for a distance, over a fence, and so along a wall that skirted the -truck garden. The little door was unlocked, as Mrs. Hooper had said -it would be, and they stumbled into the twilight of the big barn. -The only sound was the occasional stamping of a horse and the steady -_crunch-crunch_ of the cattle. - -“Fortunate beasts,” whispered Nelson. - -Overhead the mows were filled with fragrant hay, and near at hand a -ladder led up to it. From a window high up at one end of the building a -flood of red light entered from the sunset sky. - -“Shall we go up there now?” asked Nelson. - -“No. Let’s stay here until we get something to eat,” said Bob. - -So they made themselves comfortable, Dan and Nelson finding seats on -some sacks of grain, and Bob and Tom climbing into the back of a wagon -and sprawling out on the floor of it, hands under heads. - -“I’ll bet no one will have to sing me asleep to-night,” said Dan with a -luxurious sigh. “Just wait until I strike that hay up there!” - -Conversation was desultory for the next half hour, for all four of the -boys were dead tired. Tommy even dropped off to sleep once, though he -denied the fact indignantly. It seemed a long while before Mrs. Hooper -appeared, but when she did, her burden more than atoned for the period -of waiting. She carried a big tray, and it was piled high. There was -cold mutton, a pitcher of hot tea, milk, stacks of bread and plenty of -butter, preserved pears, a whole custard pie, and lots of cake. Tom was -almost tearful. Mrs. Hooper set the tray down on a box and disappeared -into the harness room, to return in a moment with a lighted lantern. - -“There,” she said; “now I guess you can see what you’re eating. When -you get through, set the tray here by the door, and I’ll get it later. -And put out the lantern carefully. Don’t leave any sparks about. In the -morning you stay up in the hay until I call you. My husband will be out -in the field by seven and then you can come to the house and have some -breakfast. Good night.” - -“Good night, ma’am,” they answered with full hearts and fuller mouths. -“We’re awfully much obliged to you.” - -“Yes’m. You’ve saved our lives,” said Dan. - -Mrs. Hooper surveyed them smilingly from the door. - -“Well, it’s real nice to see you boys eat,” she said. “I just couldn’t -bear to have you go tramping around so late without any supper. And -William wouldn’t have wanted it either, only--if it hadn’t been for -Abner Wade, you see.” - -“Yes’m!” - -“Good night, Mrs. Hooper!” - -“Thank you very much!” - -Then the door closed behind her, and they were left to the enjoyment of -their supper. And when I say enjoyment I know what I’m talking about! - -“Say, fellows,” said Dan presently, when the edge of his appetite had -been dulled by many slices of cold meat and bread and butter, “say, do -you suppose we’re always going to eat in barns on this trip?” - -“Much I’d care if it was always as good as this,” answered Nelson, -dividing the pie into four generous quarters with his knife. And the -others agreed. When only crumbs remained on the tray they blew out the -lantern, set the remains of the feast beside the door, and climbed up -into the loft. There, burrowing luxuriously in the sweet-smelling hay, -they fell asleep almost instantly. - - - - -CHAPTER V - -DESCRIBES A SECOND ENCOUNTER WITH MR. WADE - - -At a little after eight the next morning they were on their way -again. Nine hours of sound, refreshing slumber had worked a change. -Dan no longer held any grudge against the doctor, while Tom, cheered -and comforted by the biggest kind of a breakfast, was once more his -optimistic self. They had overwhelmed Mrs. Hooper with their gratitude, -had made friends with Brutus, a benevolent and toothless setter, and -had left the farmhouse with sentiments of regret. For, as Tom said, -who could tell when they would again find such coffee and such corn -muffins! Brutus had insisted upon accompanying them as far as the farm -limits, and had parted from them with tears in his eyes; at least, we -have Dan’s word for it. Nelson became philosophic. - -“It just shows,” he said vaguely, “that you can’t always tell at first -what you’re up against. Some persons are like some dogs, their bark is -worse than their bite.” - -“Sure,” agreed Dan. “Some persons haven’t any teeth.” - -It was the jolliest sort of a September morning. Once or twice -they imagined they could catch glimpses of the ocean, sparkling and -sun-flecked in the distance. Whether they actually saw it or not, they -were constantly reminded of it by the fresh, salty breeze that caressed -their faces. - -“Why can’t we go along the shore instead of here where we are?” asked -Nelson. - -“That’s so,” cried Dan. - -Bob produced his map, and they sat on the top rail of a fence and -studied it. - -“After we leave Samoset,” said Bob, “we can turn down here and go -to Sisset. There must be a hotel there, and we can spend the night. -Then----” - -“Maybe we can find a barn,” suggested Tom. - -“Then in the morning we’ll go on to Seaville or some place along there.” - -“But, look here,” objected Dan; “we’re a heap nearer the north shore -than we are the south.” - -“Yes, but what we want is the real ocean,” said Bob. “We can come home -by the Sound shore.” - -“Just as you say,” answered Dan. “Meanwhile, let’s get to Samoset -before dinner time.” - -They reached that town at a little after ten o’clock, and found it -quite a lively place. There were two hotels, and although Tom held -out awhile for a comfortable barn, they finally decided to go to the -Fairview House and have dinner. After registering, they left their -packs in the office, washed and spruced up, and went out to see the -city. The main street was well lined with stores and well filled with -vehicles. - -“This is the first thing we’ve struck,” declared Dan, “that looks like -a town. Let’s buy something.” - -So they roamed from store to store, looking into every window, and -speculating on the desirability of the articles shown. Tom bought a -pound of peanut brittle which, on close examination, proved to be much -older than supposed. Tom declared disgustedly that it wasn’t what -it was cracked up to be, a pun that elicited only groans from his -companions. Bob purchased six souvenir post cards, and insisted on -returning to the hotel to address them. So the others accompanied him, -and, while he retired to the writing room, sat themselves down on the -top step in the sunlight and attacked Tom’s candy. - -“Nothing like candy,” Dan declared, “to give a fellow an appetite for -dinner.” - -“That may be true of some candy,” answered Nelson, “but----” - -“Hello!” cried Dan excitedly. “Look there!” - -The others followed the direction of his gaze, and saw a tired-looking -sorrel horse coming up the street, drawing a battered buggy, in which -sat a single occupant. The occupant was Mr. Abner Wade. The boys -watched eagerly. Opposite the hotel Mr. Wade drew up to the sidewalk, -jumped out, and tied the horse to a post. While doing so, he glanced -across and saw them. A smile spread itself over his features, and he -waved his hand. - -“Howdy do?” he called. - -“How are you, sir?” responded Dan cordially. Nelson and Tom glanced -about at him in surprise. “A nice morning, Mr. Wade.” - -“Fine, fine!” agreed the farmer. “Well, you’re getting along, I see.” - -“Yes, sir, thank you. And, by the way, we’re much obliged for that tip -you gave us. We called on Mr. Hooper, and spent the night there. We -were certainly treated well, and we’re very much obliged to you, sir, -for sending us there.” - -Mr. Wade looked surprised. - -“That so? Er--did you tell William I sent you?” - -“Yes, indeed, and he couldn’t do too much to us--I mean for us,” -answered Dan gravely. - -“Humph!” muttered Mr. Wade doubtfully. “Speak of me, did he?” - -“Oh, yes, sir! Quite enthusiastically. And we fully agreed with -everything he said,” replied Dan genially. - -Mr. Wade stared hard for a moment. Then: - -“Well, I must be getting on,” he said. “Good luck to you.” - -“Thank you, sir; the same to you. Hope you’ll have a pleasant trip -home.” - -It is doubtful if Mr. Wade heard the latter part of the remark, for he -was entering the grocery store in front of which he had hitched. Dan -sprang up. - -“You fellows stay here,” he said softly, “and watch for him. Don’t let -him out of your sight. I’ll be back in a minute.” - -He hurried down the street and around a corner on which hung a -livery-stable sign. He was soon back. - -“Still there?” he asked. - -“Yes,” answered Nelson eagerly. “What are you going to do?” - -“I’m going to get even with the old codger,” answered Dan grimly, as he -sat down again on the step. - -“Where’d you go?” asked Tom. - -“Livery stable. Borrowed a carriage wrench. There he comes!” - -Mr. Wade issued from the grocery, cast a glance toward his horse, and -then turned up the street. They watched him until he had disappeared -into the bank, half a block away. Then Dan arose and, followed by -his companions, sauntered across the street. For a moment he glanced -carelessly in the grocery-store window. Then, quite as carelessly, he -sauntered over to the buggy. There, with Tom and Nelson in front of -him and apparently in earnest conversation, he drew the wrench from -his pocket and, unobserved, applied it to the nut of the front wheel. -Presently the trio sauntered along a few steps until Dan was beside the -back wheel. A moment later they walked slowly away down the street, -crossed and returned to the hotel. As he walked, from Dan’s jacket -pocket came a clanking sound as the steel wrench jostled a couple of -iron nuts. When they had regained the porch Dan’s look of innocence -gave place to a grin of delight and satisfaction. - -“You watch for him. If he comes call me. I’m going to get Bob and our -knapsacks.” - -“What do you want the knapsacks for?” asked Tom suspiciously. - -“Because it’s more than likely that we’ll want to leave here in a -hurry, my son,” answered Dan gravely. - -“Without our dinner?” cried Tom. - -“What is dinner to revenge?” asked Dan sweetly. - -“But--but--” stammered Tom. - -“S-sh!” cautioned Dan. “Not a word above a whisker!” - -“But look here, Dan,” said Nelson a bit anxiously, “aren’t you afraid -the old duffer’ll get hurt? Maybe the horse will run away!” - -“Have you seen the horse?” asked Dan. “Now keep a watch up the street -and don’t forget to call me if he comes. I wouldn’t miss it for a -thousand dollars!” - -“Just the same, I don’t quite like it,” said Nelson when Dan had -disappeared. - -“And no dinner!” moaned Tom. “Why couldn’t we let the old idiot alone -until we’d had something to eat?” - -Dan returned with the knapsacks and they awaited developments. -Presently Bob joined them, his hands bearing eloquent proof of his -recent occupation. They didn’t tell Bob what was up for fear he might -forbid them to go on with it. Ten minutes passed. The dinner gong rang -and Tom looked restlessly and mutinous. - -“I’m going to have my dinner,” he muttered. - -“All right,” answered Bob; “let’s go in.” - -“Oh, just wait a minute,” begged Dan. “We’ll have more appetite if we -sit here awhile longer. By the way, we saw our old friend, Mr. Abner -Wade, awhile ago, Bob.” - -“Yes, you did,” said Bob incredulously. - -“Honest! That’s his horse and buggy over there now.” - -Bob had to hear about it and ten minutes more passed. Then Tom mutinied -openly. - -“I’m going to have my dinner,” he said doggedly. “I’m starved. You -fellows can sit here if you want to, but----” - -“Here he comes!” cried Nelson softly. - -Tom forgot his hunger, and the expression of rebellious dissatisfaction -on his countenance gave way to a look of pleasurable anticipation. Dan -and Nelson watched silently the approach of Mr. Abner Wade. - -“Look here,” demanded Bob suspiciously, “what’s up, you chaps?” - -There was no answer, for Mr. Wade was untying his sorrel steed. Tom -giggled hysterically. In climbed the farmer. - -“Get ap,” he commanded, and the sorrel horse moved off leisurely. The -boys held their breath. Farther and farther away went Mr. Wade--and -nothing happened! Dan began to look uneasy. Tom’s pale gray eyes opened -wider and wider. And then, just when it seemed that the conspirators -were doomed to disappointment, Nemesis overtook Mr. Abner Wade. - -Suddenly, without warning, the front wheel on the far side of the buggy -started off on its own hook and went rolling toward the sidewalk. -Reaching the curb, it toppled over and fell on to the foot of a -passer-by. The passer-by set up a cry of alarm--possibly of anguish. At -the next moment the rear wheel, indignant, perhaps, at the desertion -of its mate, lay down flat in the street. And simultaneously over went -the buggy and out slid Mr. Abner Wade. The sorrel horse, evincing no -alarm, stopped short in his tracks. And the crowd gathered, hiding the -astonished and wrathful face of Mr. Wade and stilling the cries of the -gentleman who had come in contact with the front wheel. - -Over on the hotel porch four boys, doubled up with laughter, staggered -into the office, and, led by Dan, passed hurriedly out of a rear door. -And as they went, from the dining room came an appealing odor of -cooked viands. Out on the side street Dan dodged into a livery stable -and rejoined them quickly. - -“Let’s go this way,” he gurgled. “I don’t know where it takes us to, -but----” - -“Did you do that?” demanded Bob. - -“Yes; wasn’t it rich? We didn’t tell you for fear you wouldn’t let us -do it.” - -“You chump!” answered Bob. “Why, I’d have helped if you’d told me!” - -“It was simply gu-gu-great!” stammered Tom. “Only--say, did you fellows -smell that dinner?” - -“Yes, my son,” answered Dan, “but there’s no dinner for us just now. Us -for the broad highway!” - -A few minutes later they had left the village behind and were passing -between rolling meadows. Dan took two small articles from his pocket -and shied them, one after another, into a cornfield. - -“What were those?” asked Bob. - -“Nuts,” answered Dan. “Nuts from the hubs of Abe’s chariot.” - -“I suppose he can get more,” said Nelson regretfully. - -“Yes, but it’ll take him some time, and they’ll charge him for them. -And I’ll bet that’ll nearly break his heart. Oh, he’s a great joker, is -Abe, but there are others!” - -“Where’s this road taking us to?” asked Tom. - -“I don’t know, but not toward Sisset, I’ll bet,” said Dan. “Pull out -that lying map of yours, Bob.” - -But the map didn’t help much, since they didn’t know which of the -numerous roads they were traveling. - -“Let’s see that old compass of yours, Tommy,” demanded Dan. “What’s the -matter with it? Say, it’s gone crazy!” - -“Get out! You don’t know how to use it,” said Tom. “Give it here.” He -tapped it smartly on his knee, observed it gravely a moment, studied -the position of the sun, and then announced, “There! That’s north!” - -“Then we’re going back home,” said Nelson discouragedly, “straight back -toward New York!” - -“Pshaw! We can’t be,” said Bob. “Here, let’s see. Get out, you idiots, -you’re looking at the wrong end of the needle. There’s north and we’re -going northeast by east.” - -“Ship ahoy!” murmured Dan. “Sail off the weather bow, sir.” - -“Then if we keep on we’ll strike Barrington?” asked Tom. - -“Yes, and that means a good hotel, Tommy, and a good dinner. It’s -rather a joke on us, though,” continued Bob. “We had decided to go to -the south shore, and here we are only three or four miles from the -Sound!” - -“We’re not that far from water,” said Nelson, pointing to the map. -“Here’s Old Spring Harbor right forninst us here.” - -“That’s right. Well, say, then we must be on this road here,” said Bob, -pointing. “If we are, we ought to strike a bridge pretty soon where we -cross this creek, or whatever it is.” - -But their doubt was set at rest a moment later when a man in a dogcart -slowed down at their hail and gave them all the information they -desired. - -“This is the Barrington road,” he said, “and Barrington station is -about two miles. The town is three miles from here, straight ahead. -There are several hotels there and lots of boarding houses.” - -“That man’s a regular cyclopedia,” said Dan when the dogcart was out of -sight. - -“He’s a bearer of good tidings,” said Tom thoughtfully. - -A mile farther on hunger overcame Tom’s discretion and he partook of -some half-ripe apples, against the advice of the others. But although -the others viewed him apprehensively all the rest of the way, Tom -showed no ill effects, although he had to own up to an uneasiness. The -last two miles of the distance was in sight of the water, and once they -crossed a broad creek which farther inland widened into a small lake. -They rested there awhile and it was close on to four o’clock when, -tired and hungry and warm, they tramped into the town of Barrington and -sought the nearest hotel. Ten minutes later, after they had washed -up, Dan proposed going for a swim. Nelson and Bob consented, but Tom -was not to be persuaded. He sank into an armchair in the lobby in full -sight of a pair of folding doors which opened into the dining room. - -“You fellows go ahead,” he said grimly. “I’m going to stay right here.” - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -WITNESSES A RESCUE AND AN ADDITION TO THE PARTY - - -After supper Dan reminded the others that they hadn’t written to their -folks about Jerry and they all sought the writing room. Those were the -first letters home, and, of course, there was a good deal to write. -None of them had any trouble in filling eight pages except Tom. Tom -wasn’t much of a letter writer, anyway, and then, besides, he had eaten -a great deal of dinner and was inclined toward slumber. But he managed -to make a strong plea for Jerry Hinkley and to assure his folks that he -was having “a dandy time.” After that he went fast asleep with his head -on the blotting pad. - -“Now, look here, you fellows,” said Nelson, the next morning, “of -course this thing of running around the island and not knowing where -you’re going to fetch up is very exciting and all that, but it’s risky. -First thing we know we’ll find ourselves back in Long Island City. I -move that we fix on some definite place and go there.” - -“That’s what I think,” said Bob. “Let’s do it.” - -So they studied the map again and decided to keep along the north -shore for a while and then strike across the island for the ocean -side. Meanwhile the town of Kingston was settled on as their immediate -destination. Kingston was some eighteen miles distant and they thought -they could reach it that evening. They were on their way again at eight -o’clock, for the day promised to be hot toward noon and they hoped to -be able to reach Meadowville in time for luncheon and lay off there for -a couple of hours. - -The Sound, blue and calm in the morning sunlight, was on their left and -remained in sight most of the time. Once or twice their way led along -the very edge of it. They had put some five or six miles behind them at -a quarter to ten and were approaching a place where the road crossed a -bridge. On the right a river wound back through a salt marsh. To the -left, after running under the bridge, it emptied itself into a little -bay. Near the bridge were a number of boat and bath houses, one or two -cottages, and some floats and landings. On one of the landings a number -of boys and men were congregated, and as the four drew near, their -curiosity was aroused. Half the occupants of the float were lying on -their stomachs, apparently trying to see under it, while the rest were -walking excitedly about. - -“Come on,” said Dan. “Let’s see what’s up.” - -So they quickened their pace, turned off from the road, and made their -way to the float. - -“What’s the matter?” asked Dan. - -“There’s a dog under here,” explained a youth. “We were throwing -pieces of wood for him and he was fetchin’ them out. Then, first thing -we knew, the current took him somehow and sucked him under the float. -He’s there now. Hear him?” - -They listened and presently there came a faint, smothered yelp -from under the planks almost at their feet. By that time half the -inhabitants of the float had joined them, eager to tell all about it. - -“How long has he been under there?” asked Bob. - -“Ten minutes.” - -“Five minutes.” - -“Three minutes.” - -The answers were varied. The boys hurried over to the side. The tide -was running out hard and the river, flowing through the narrow culvert -under the bridge, made a strong current which swirled against the float -until it tugged at its moorings. - -“Here’s where he went under,” explained one of their informants. “We -were throwing sticks for him out there and he was having a bully time. -He was a plucky little chap. Then the current took him and he went -down. And next thing he was yelping like thunder underneath here.” - -The float, inch-thick boards spiked to big logs, rested in the water -so that the floor was some six inches above the surface. The dog had -apparently come up underneath, was penned in by the logs, and was -managing to keep his head out of water by hard swimming. - -“What kind of a dog is it?” asked Nelson. - -“Fox terrier, I guess.” - -“Wire-haired terrier.” - -“Irish terrier.” - -“Well, he’s small, is he?” asked Bob impatiently. - -“Yes.” They all agreed as to that. Bob turned to the others. - -“Who’s going under?” he asked. - -“Let me go,” said Tom. But Dan had already thrown off his coat and -kicked off his shoes. - -“Dan’s a better diver than you, Tom,” said Bob. “Let him try it first. -I guess there’s plenty of breathing space under there, Dan.” - -“Sure,” answered Dan, struggling out of his shirt. “Anyone heard the -poor little chap lately?” - -No one had, but at that moment, as though in answer to Dan’s inquiry, a -faint, gurgling sound came from under the floor. - -“There he is,” said Nelson. “I’ll stand here and call to you, Dan. You -want to go under about twelve feet.” - -“All right,” said Dan. “If I don’t show up inside of half a minute and -you don’t hear from me, one of you chaps had better come in.” - -“All right,” answered Bob; “I’ll be ready.” - -Then Dan dropped feet foremost over the edge of the float and went down -out of sight in the rushing green water. A moment after those leaning -over the edge caught a glimpse of a kicking leg. Then several seconds -passed. The crowd on the float listened breathlessly. At last, from -under the boards and a few feet away, came Dan’s voice. - -“All right, Nel! Where are you?” - -“Here!” called Nelson, his mouth at one of the cracks. - -“Must be the next section,” answered Dan’s muffled voice. “Wait a -minute.” - -There was a faint splashing sound, silence, and again came Dan’s voice. - -“I’ve got him!” he called. “I’m coming out the other side.” - -A moment later Dan’s wet head and a half-drowned wire-haired terrier -appeared at the same moment. The dog was held out at arm’s length and -Bob seized him. Others gave their hands to Dan and he was quickly -pulled out on to the float. - -“Gee, that water’s cold!” he gasped. “How’s the dog? He was just about -gone when I got to him. He had managed to get one paw into a crevice in -a log, but his head was under water half the time, I guess. Who’s got -him?” - -“Here he is,” said Bob. “He’s all right. About scared to death, I -guess, and pretty well soaked.” - -“Maybe he’s swallowed some water,” suggested Tom. “Hold him upside down -a minute.” - -Bob obeyed and nearly half a pint of salt water streamed out of the -dog’s mouth. After that he seemed much better, but was content for the -moment to lie in Bob’s arms and gasp and shiver, looking up the while -into Bob’s face with an expression which surely meant gratitude. He was -a forlorn little thing when they finally set him down and he feebly -shook himself. The hair was plastered close to his body, and his inch -of tail wagged feebly. - -“Who’s dog is he?” asked Nelson. - -“I don’t know,” said one of the throng. “He’s been around here for -a couple of days. Don’t believe he belongs to anyone. There isn’t -anything on the collar; I looked.” - -Some one brought Dan a couple of towels from one of the bath houses -and he dried himself as best he could. Afterwards he trotted about the -float a minute and along the edge of the little beach. - -“Say, he’s a plucky one, he is,” said one of the youths to Nelson. - -“Who’s that?” asked Nelson. - -“Why, that friend of yours; him that got the dog out.” - -“Oh, yes, Dan’s plucky,” answered Nelson. “But that wasn’t any stunt -for Dan. That’s one of the easiest things he does.” And he turned away, -leaving the youth staring hard. - -“Well, let’s get on,” said Dan, tying the last shoe lace. - -So they started back toward the road, leaving the crowd, which had -grown steadily for the last five minutes, looking admiringly at Dan’s -broad back. When they had reached the road, there was a shout from the -float and they looked back. - -“Hey! There comes the dog!” some one called. - -And sure enough, there was the terrier close behind them. He apparently -had no doubts as to his welcome. His tiny tail was wagging busily as he -went up to Bob, sniffed at his legs, and then turned and made straight -for Dan, a few feet away. - -“Hello,” said Dan; “you remember me, do you?” - -For answer the dog placed his front paws on Dan’s knee and looked -inquiringly up into his face. - -“I believe he knows you rescued him,” said Bob. - -“Of course he does,” said Dan. “You’ve got sense, haven’t you, Towser?” - -The terrier sneezed and wagged his tail frantically, pawing at Dan’s -knee. - -“Hello; catching cold, are you?” Dan picked him up and snuggled him in -his arms. “That won’t do. Mustn’t catch cold, you know.” The dog licked -Dan’s face and wriggled ecstatically. - -“He seems to like you,” said Tom. “Dogs are funny creatures.” - -“He’s a nice little dog,” said Dan as he dropped him gently to the -ground again. “I wouldn’t mind having him.” - -“Wonder if he really is a stray?” said Nelson. - -“Well, come on, fellows; it’s getting late,” said Bob, “and we’re only -a little more than halfway to Meadowville.” - -“Now you run along home, Mr. Dog,” said Dan, shaking his finger at -the terrier. The terrier seemed to understand, for his manner became -at once sorrowful and dejected. He watched them go off without a wag -of his tail. Presently Dan stole a backward glance. The terrier was -stealing along behind them some twenty yards back. Dan said nothing. -A few minutes later Bob and Nelson became aware of something trotting -along in the rear. They turned. The terrier stopped with one foot in -the air. His tail wagged conciliatingly. - -“Go home!” said Bob sternly. - -The dog dropped his head and began to sniff at the ground as though the -last thing in his mind was following them. Nelson and Tom laughed. - -“Oh, let him come,” muttered Dan. - -“It wouldn’t be fair,” said Bob firmly. “He must belong to some one and -they’d probably feel bad if they lost him.” - -“All right,” said Dan. “You get along home, doggie.” - -But doggie was busy now following an imaginary scent along the side of -the road. - -“Throw a stone at him,” said Tom. - -“You do it if you want to,” said Bob. - -But Tom didn’t seem to want to. Finally Bob picked up an imaginary -missile and made a motion toward the dog. He didn’t run, but paused -and stared at them with an expression of such surprise and sorrow that -Bob’s heart failed him. - -“Oh, come on,” he muttered. “He won’t follow.” - -Five minutes later when they reached a turn in the road they looked -back. There stood the terrier where they had left him, still looking -after their retreating forms. The next moment he was lost to sight. - -“He was a nice little dog,” said Dan regretfully. - -They reached Meadowville without further adventure just before noon, -having made, in spite of the delay, a very creditable morning record. -There was no choice in the matter of hotels, since the village boasted -of but one--a small, white-painted, old-fashioned hostelry standing -with its front steps flush with the village street. A long porch ran -the length of the house, and a dozen armchairs invited to rest. But the -proprietor informed them that dinner was ready and so they made at once -for the washroom, removed the dust of the highway, and subsequently -were conducted into the dining room, already well filled. They had -just finished their soup--all save Tom, who had requested a second -helping--when the proprietor appeared before them. - -“Say, did any of you boys bring a dog?” he asked. - -“No,” and they shook their heads. - -“All right. There’s one out here and I can’t get rid of him. I didn’t -know but he might belong to some of you. I never saw the cur before.” - -“Here! Hold on,” cried Dan, jumping up. “Let’s see him.” - -They all trooped out into the office. There, nosing excitedly about, -was the wire-haired terrier. When he caught sight of them he stopped, -crouched to the floor, and wagged his bit of tail violently. They broke -into a laugh; all save Dan. - -“It’s all right,” said Dan decisively. “That’s my dog.” - -He strode over to him. The terrier rolled over on to his back, stuck -all four feet toward the ceiling, and awaited annihilation. But it -didn’t come. Instead, Dan took him into his arms and faced the others. - -“I guess he can stay with us now, can’t he?” he asked. - -“You bet,” said Bob. - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -WHEREIN BARRY DISTINGUISHES HIMSELF - - -They rested until a little after two o’clock, and then, the intensest -heat of a very hot day having passed, they took up their journey again, -the party of four now having become a party of five. - -The fifth member had remained on the porch while the boys had eaten -their dinners. There had been some compulsion about it, as a cord -had been tied to his collar and then to the railing. But after the -first minute or two, during which he had evidently labored under the -impression that his newly found friends were about to escape him again, -he had accepted the situation philosophically and had even dozed once -or twice there in the sun. He looked very much better after he had -been released and, surrounded by the boys, had eaten a hearty dinner. -The sun had dried his coat, and the food had apparently restored his -self-respect. A man in whipcord, probably a groom or stableman, paused -on his way out of the hotel. - -“That’s a nice-looking dog you’ve got there,” he observed after a -silent contemplation of the terrier. “Where’d you get him, if it’s no -offense, sir?” - -Dan hesitated. Then: - -“Over near Barrington,” he answered uneasily. - -“Thoroughbred, I guess,” said the other questioningly. - -Dan nodded carelessly. The man stooped and snapped his fingers. - -“Here, boy, come see me. What’s his name, sir?” - -“Er--Barry,” stammered Dan. - -“Here, Barry!” called the man. But the terrier acted just as though -he’d never heard his name before. - -“He looks a lot like Forest Lad, the dog that won so many prizes in New -York last winter,” continued the man. “But he’s a bit thinner across -the breast than him, I guess. A fine-looking dog, though. Want to sell -him?” - -“No, I don’t think so,” answered Dan. - -“Well, I don’t want him myself, but I guess I could tell you where you -could find a purchaser, and not very far off.” - -“He’s not for sale,” said Dan. - -“Well, I don’t know as I’d want to sell him if he was mine,” said the -other as he moved off. - -“Look here, what did you call him Barry for?” asked Nelson. - -“Gee! I had to call him something,” said Dan, “and that’s the first -thing I thought of. I didn’t want that fellow to think I’d stolen the -dog.” - -“Well, but what’s Barry mean? What made you think of that?” - -“I don’t know,” answered Dan, puzzled. - -“I do,” said Tom. “You’d just told the man you got him at Barrington; -see? Barry--Barrington.” - -“I guess that was it. Mr. Barry, of Barrington. Well, that isn’t such a -bad name.” - -“It’s easy to say,” responded Bob. “Here, Barry.” - -But the terrier only wagged his tail in a friendly way. - -“He’ll learn his name quick enough,” said Dan. “I wonder, though, what -his real name is.” - -“Let’s see if we can find out,” suggested Bob. “We’ll call him all the -names we can think of and see if he answers to any of them.” - -So they started in, and the terrier, evidently at a loss to know what -it all meant, laid himself down in the sunlight and observed them with -puzzled eyes. They tried all the usual names they could think of, and -then they started on unusual ones. But when Tom got to Launcelot, Dan -interfered. - -“Look here, that will do for you,” he said. “I’m not going to have my -dog called any such names as that. You’ll be calling him Reginald next, -I suppose!” - -“What name was that that fellow got off?” questioned Nelson. “Forest -Lad, was it?” - -“Yes; maybe that’s his name. Let’s try it. Here, Forest Lad!” - -But the terrier only yawned. - -“Not the same,” said Nelson. “He doesn’t just look like a dog who would -win prizes, does he?” - -“Why not?” demanded Dan indignantly. “He’s a mighty fine-looking dog, I -tell you!” - -“Even if his name is Barry,” laughed Tom. - -“Well, we’ve given him plenty of chances to choose a name to suit -himself,” said Bob, “and he hasn’t done it. So I guess Barry will have -to do.” - -“It’s a good name,” said Dan stoutly. “Isn’t it, Barry?” - -Barry wagged his tail. That seemed to settle it. - -When, presently, they took the road again, Barry remained at Dan’s -heels for the first half mile or so, like a well-trained dog. But when, -after one or two experimental trips into the bushes, Barry found that -his new master was not a strict disciplinarian, he cut loose. After -that he was everywhere. Over walls, through fences, into this field -and into that, chasing birds, scratching for field mice, and treeing -squirrels, Barry had, as Dan put it, the time of his innocent young -life. But he always came instantly when called, no matter how far away -he might be; came like a small white streak of lightning, tongue out -and eyes sparkling merrily. He was a source of constant entertainment, -and the seven miles which lay between Meadowville and Kingston passed -underfoot almost before they knew it. As they came in sight of the -latter town a brisk shower began. For an hour past the clouds had been -gathering, big and heavy, overhead, and now the thunder began to crash. -Luckily they had but a short distance to go and they covered it in -record time, Barry, barking hysterically, leading the flying column by -six yards. They found a temporary refuge in a livery stable on the edge -of town, and the terrier put in an exciting ten minutes hunting rats in -the stalls. The stable keeper, a large, good-natured man, offered Dan -$10 on the spot for the dog and when that offer was declined raised the -price to $15. Dan was highly pleased at the compliment paid to Barry, -but refused to part with him. - -Presently the shower held up for a moment and they thanked their host -and scampered for the nearest hotel. Here they met with difficulties. -The proprietor didn’t take dogs. Dan argued and offered to pay extra, -but the hotel man was obdurate. There was nothing for it but to try -elsewhere, and so out they went again in a pelting rain and hurried -down the street to the next hostelry. Here Barry was more welcome; he -could sleep in the smoking room or in the stable. Dan decided in favor -of the smoking room, borrowed a piece of cord from the clerk, and -hitched Barry to the leg of a writing table. After supper, the rain -having held up again, they went out and purchased a leather leash. -Barry took very kindly to this and was for chewing it up until Dan -explained the purpose of it to him. They played cards in the smoking -room until bedtime, and then, having made Barry comfortable for the -night on a piece of bagging, went to their rooms and, as was becoming -after an eighteen-mile tramp, fell promptly asleep. - -Dan and Nelson slept together. It was at about two o’clock in the -morning--although that fact wasn’t discovered until later--that Dan -awoke to find Nelson shaking him by the arm. - -“Wha--what’s the row?” asked Dan sleepily. - -“Barry’s raising Cain downstairs,” answered Nelson. “Listen!” - -Their room was on the second floor near the stairway, and through -the open transom floated a startling medley of sounds, frantic barks -succeeded by blood-curdling growls, scurrying footsteps, and the crash -of an overturned chair. - -“That’s never Barry!” cried Dan. - -“I’ll bet you it is,” said Nelson. “We’d better go down and see, -anyway.” - -But Dan was already bumping into furniture in an endeavor to find his -trousers. Nelson followed him, but he had more difficulty than his -friend in finding his apparel, and Dan was out of the room and down the -stairs before Nelson’s search was finished. - -Dan took the stairs two or three at a time; he wasn’t particular; -and when he reached the office a strange sight greeted his startled -eyes. The one gaslight was burning dimly, but it afforded sufficient -illumination to show what was going on. On the office counter crouched -a man. He wasn’t a very big man, nor was he very prepossessing. His -clothes had seen much wear and he was badly in need of a shave. Also he -was plainly frightened. And there was cause. The cause, with some two -feet of brand-new leather leash hanging to his collar, leaped excitedly -at the counter in a businesslike effort to get at the occupant of it, -and every time he leaped he either barked or growled. Dan took in the -situation in an instant, but he didn’t pretend to understand it. The -hotel proprietor, however, who appeared on the scene at that moment, -bearing evidences of a hurried dressing, understood it at once. - -[Illustration: “Leaped excitedly at the counter.”] - -“Barry!” called Dan. “Come here, sir! Come here!” - -“Let him alone,” said the proprietor. “He knows his business, that dog. -What are you doing in here?” he asked sternly of the man on the counter. - -“Nothin’,” was the answer. “Call off that beast, can’t yer?” - -“You’ll stay where you are a minute, I guess,” answered the proprietor -grimly. Then he strode to the door, unlocked it, and passed out to the -porch. - -“Hi, Brooks! Brooks!” he called loudly. “O Brooks!” - -From somewhere near at hand came an answering hail. Then things began -to happen indoors. Barry, aware of Dan’s presence, had stopped his -barking and leaping and was watching his prey warily from the distance -of a few feet. Dan also had his eyes on the man, but for all that he -wasn’t prepared for what happened. When the answering hail came the man -on the counter gathered himself quickly and made a flying leap over -Barry’s head. The front door was guarded by the proprietor, and Dan -stood between the counter and the door leading to the washroom and the -back of the hotel. Only the stairway seemed unguarded, and toward that -the man fled, Barry after him and gaining at every leap. Dan set up a -shout and followed Barry. At that moment Nelson, having finally got -into his trousers, appeared on the landing halfway up. - -“Stop him!” cried Dan. “Stop him!” - -The pursued caught sight of Nelson at the same moment and his hand flew -toward his pocket. Nelson drew aside warily, but as the other plunged -past he threw out his leg and the next moment Nelson and the man and -Barry were all mixed up in a writhing heap on the landing. But Dan was -up there in a second, Barry was thrown aside, and in a twinkling the -battle was decided. - -“Grab that hand,” panted Nelson. “He’s got a revolver.” - -Dan obeyed and wrested the implement away. It proved, however, to be -not a revolver, but a heavy, leather-covered billy about six inches -long. After that the man underneath gave up the struggle and lay quiet -until Mr. Brooks, who turned out to be the town constable, yanked him -to his feet. - -By that time most of the occupants of the hotel, including Tom and -Bob, had assembled in various stages of undress, and the hubbub was -considerable. Tom was wildly excited and stammered question after -question. But no one paid any heed to him. A bag well filled with -plated silverware, gleaned from the dining room, into which apartment -the burglar had made his way by forcing a window, was found back of -the counter. The officer took the names of about twenty persons, most -of whom had seen nothing of the affair, and the unfortunate man was -haled away to the jail. After that, for more than an hour, all the -male occupants of the house sat around in the office and discussed and -rediscussed the affair. Naturally, Barry and Nelson and Dan came in -for much praise, Barry especially. Everyone had to pet him, and a less -sensible dog might have had his head turned. But Barry took his honors -modestly; in fact, he seemed rather bored by the admiration bestowed -upon him. Along toward four o’clock the excitement had died down -sufficiently to permit of the occupants returning to bed, and this -they did, Tom bewailing loudly his ill luck in having arrived on the -scene too late. - -“If I had bu-bu-bu-been there,” began Tommy. - -“If you had been there,” interrupted Bob unkindly, “the thief would -have got away while you were choking over it.” - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -IN WHICH POVERTY CLAIMS THE FOUR - - -The next day was Thursday. Nelson declared it wasn’t; that it was -only Wednesday; but the blue, red, and yellow calendar advertising -Somebody’s Smokeless Powder, which hung in the hotel office, -contradicted him. But whatever day it was it was anything but a -pleasant one. Last evening’s thundershower had resolved itself into a -steady, persistent drizzle. The boys woke late, in consequence of the -early morning diversions, and when they looked at the sky and the muddy -road they sighed. It was Tom who dared voice what all were thinking. - -“This is no kind of weather to go messing around the country in,” he -said disgustedly. “Besides, there’s Dan’s health to think of. Why, he’s -just out of bed, as you might say!” - -“A little rain won’t hurt,” said Dan half-heartedly. - -“Not a bit,” agreed Bob. “It--it would be rather fun. We haven’t tried -our ponchos yet, you know.” - -“I fear you’re lazy, Tommy,” added Nelson sorrowfully. - -“Lazy nothing! Look at that street out there and then think what the -country road would be like! I’ll tell you one thing, if you fellows go, -you go without little Tommy.” - -“Oh, well, if you won’t go along,” said Nelson, in a somewhat relieved -tone. - -“If you want to make us miss a day,” continued Dan. - -“I don’t think we ought to break up the crowd,” said Bob. “I don’t -believe our folks would like that. So if Tommy won’t go, why, we’ll all -stay here to-day and go on to-morrow. What do you say?” - -“Oh, pshaw,” said Tom disgustedly; “you’re all just as anxious to stay -as I am! You make me tired!” - -The others grinned. - -“Only consideration for your welfare, Tommy, keeps us here,” said Dan. - -“Then you can ju-ju-just let my wu-wu-wu-welfare alone,” answered Tom -aggrievedly. - -“Not for worlds, old chap! Come on downstairs and let’s see if we can’t -find something to do.” - -They went down and rescued Barry from the admiring attention of the -populace, which, having learned by this time of the early morning -adventure, had flocked in to view the scene and the heroes. - -“I wonder what they’ll do to him,” said Dan, in reference to the -marauder, as they pushed their way through the crowd about the office -door. - -“Put him in prison, I suppose,” answered Bob. - -“Reckon they won’t do anything to him just at present,” volunteered the -driver of the station ’bus who was standing near by. - -“Why?” asked Dan. - -“’Cause,” said the driver with a chuckle, “they ain’t got him.” - -“Ain’t got him!” repeated Dan ungrammatically. - -“No; he broke away from Joe Brooks last night just this side of the -jail. Joe fired at him and _he_ says he hit him, but I don’t believe -Joe could hit a barn door, let alone a man runnin’ like all git out! -Anyway, the feller never stopped runnin’; I reckon he’s runnin’ yit!” - -“Well,” said Dan, as they went out on to the porch with Barry at -heel, “of course he was a thief and all that, and he had one of the -toughest-looking faces I ever saw, but, just the same, I’m kind of glad -he got away. He looked just about half-starved, Bob. And I’m not stuck -on helping to put anyone in prison. Maybe he’ll behave himself after -this.” - -“Well, from what I’ve seen of the tableware,” said Bob dryly, “I guess -the chap’s better off without it. I don’t believe he could have got -thirty cents for the lot!” - -Presently they went to writing letters, and even Tom, with the burglar -episode to tell of, managed to fill two pages. Afterwards they were -requested to bring Barry out to the office, and, doing so, found the -proprietor and a couple of dozen others assembled waiting for them. -Barry was placed on the top of the office desk and the proprietor -made him a speech of thanks, frequently interrupted by laughter and -applause, and when he had finished presented to the hero a new collar -and leash. Dan, speaking for Barry, responded somewhat embarrassedly -and the new collar was placed around the dog’s neck. Then everyone went -into dinner in high good humor. - -“What did you do with the old leash, Dan?” asked Tom. - -“It’s upstairs. Why? It’s busted, you know.” - -“I know it is. Give it to me?” - -“Sure. What for?” - -“Oh, nothing much,” answered Tom. - -But after dinner he went up and got it and disappeared for a while. -When he returned he proudly exhibited a black leather cardcase and -three braided leather watch fobs. - -“Where’d you get those?” asked Bob. - -“At the leather store. I took the leash back and told the man it was no -good; broke the first time it was used. I said I’d take something else -in exchange.” - -“Well, I’ll be blowed!” gasped Dan. “And he did it?” - -“He didn’t want to at first. Said he hadn’t sold the leash to me. But -I told him you couldn’t come yourself because you had to stay at the -hotel and hold the dog by the collar to keep him from running away. -Then I offered to take ninety-five cents’ worth of other goods, and -that fetched him; the leash was a dollar, you know. So I got this -cardcase for myself in payment for my trouble, you see, and brought -those fobs for you chaps. Swell, aren’t they?” - -“Oh, they’re terribly dressy,” answered Dan sarcastically. “I couldn’t -think of wearing mine on ordinary occasions, Tom.” - -They tried to tease him about the transaction, but Tom didn’t mind a -bit; he was quite satisfied with his dickering. - -“If you fellows don’t like the fobs,” he told them, “you can go back -and change them. He’s got some dandy things there.” - -For the rest of the afternoon they played cards in the smoking room, -and Dan and Nelson won overwhelmingly. Then they took Barry out for -a few minutes of exercise, and Bob squandered more money on souvenir -postals and spent half an hour after supper trying to think of -something to write on them. Dan and Nelson unearthed a box of dominoes -and had an exciting game. Tom went to sleep in an armchair over a New -York paper, and Barry, comfortably curled up in his lap, mingled his -snores with Tom’s. - -Friday dawned fair and cool. After breakfast they packed their baggage, -paid their bills--which were suspiciously moderate--and, with the -proprietor’s hearty “Come again, boys!” in their ears, swung off -down the street. When they reached the country road they found that -the rain had done a world of good. The dust was laid and the roadbed -was hard and firm. Barry was in fine fettle and kept them laughing at -his wild sorties after birds and chipmunks. From Kingston their route -led diagonally across the island toward the south shore, which they -intended to reach that evening. By this time their muscles were well -hardened and they reeled the miles off without conscious effort. - -They had brought lunch with them in case, as seemed probable, they -should find no hotel on the way. And so when, at a little before noon, -they reached the edge of a big pond where a cluster of willows along -the edge offered inviting shade, they pitched camp. - -“I tell you what let’s do,” said Nelson. - -“Go ahead,” said Bob lazily from where he was stretched out on his back. - -“Let’s have a swim before lunch. What do you say?” - -They said various things, the tenor of which was that Nelson sometimes -exhibited almost human intelligence and in the present case had evolved -a brilliant idea. - -“But we can’t undress here,” said Bob. “Too many autos and carriages -and things going along this road. Let’s keep along here by the edge -until we get away from the public.” - -So they took up their packs and followed the margin of the pond and -after a few minutes found themselves in a thick grove several hundred -feet from the highway. Here they dropped their knapsacks, undressed, -and donned their trunks, Barry viewing proceedings with eager eyes. And -when they raced down to the water he leaped and barked ecstatically. - -“I should think,” said Nelson severely, “that you would have had enough -water to last you for some time, Mr. Dog.” - -“Oh, that was salt water, wasn’t it, Barry?” answered Dan. “Let’s see -if he’ll come in. Here, Barry! Sic ’em!” - -Barry settled the question in an instant, plunging in beside Dan and -swimming about excitedly in circles and biting at the floating twigs -and leaves. The water was quite warm and, as Dan said, reminded them of -Lake Chicora, by whose shore they had all spent the preceding summer. -But it wasn’t deep enough for Dan, to whom bathing meant diving, and he -set off along the shore in search of deeper water. The others followed, -Barry retiring to the shore and barking joyfully as he trotted along. -There were some residences on the opposite side of the lake, almost -half a mile away, and Bob pointed them out. - -“Maybe they don’t allow bathing here,” he said. - -“Maybe they don’t,” laughed Nelson; “but it’s too late now. There goes -Dan; he’s found a tree trunk to dive off of.” - -They had a fine time for half an hour and then swam back in search of -the place they had left. - -“I don’t see anything that looks like it,” said Tom. - -“Nor I,” said Dan. “Say, wouldn’t it be a joke if we couldn’t find our -clothes?” - -“A mighty poor one,” answered Bob. “We’d ought to have made Barry stay -and look after them. Then we’d known where they were.” - -“Oh, they’re right along here somewhere,” said Nelson. “We went in -opposite that big white house over there, the one with the high chimney -on the outside.” - -“Huh!” said Dan. “That’s a half mile away. Any place over here is -opposite. Let’s go out here and look around.” - -They did, and they looked a long time. But finally there was a shout -from Tommy, who had meandered off on his own hook. - -“Here they are!” he called. Then, a moment later, - -“We’ve been ru-ru-ru-ru-robbed!” yelled Tom. - -“_What?_” cried Dan. - -“Oh, it’s one of Tommy’s jokes,” muttered Nelson anxiously as they -raced toward where he was standing. But it wasn’t. It needed but one -glance to prove that. The contents of the knapsacks were scattered -about under the trees, the lunches were gone, and their clothes had -evidently been handled. Bob picked up his coat and thrust his hand -into a pocket. Then he seized his trousers and went through the same -performance. And the others followed suit as though it had been a game -of follow-your-leader. Then they all dropped the garments and looked at -each other blankly. - -“Stripped!” said Dan. - -“Every blessed cent gone,” said Nelson. “Watch too!” - -“I had twenty-six dollars,” said Tom mournfully. - -“You shouldn’t carry so much wealth about with you,” answered Dan with -a grin. “It ought to be a lesson to you. I only had eight.” - -“You shut up!” growled Tom. - -“Well, whoever they were,” said Bob ruefully, “they made a pretty good -haul. I had about fifteen dollars. And they got my watch too. But it -was only a cheap one.” - -“Mine wasn’t,” said Nelson. “It cost forty dollars. Say, what’s the -matter with Barry?” - -The terrier was running excitedly about, smelling and sniffing and -giving vent to short yelps. Once or twice he started off through the -trees as though nothing could stop him. But each time he turned back, -whining, and began sniffing the ground again. - -“Barry’s got the fellow’s scent,” said Nelson. - -“And the fellow’s got every cent of mine,” said Dan. - -“Gee!” said Tom sorrowfully, “I don’t see anything to ju-ju-joke about!” - -“Hello!” Bob stooped and picked up a piece of paper. It was part of an -envelope which had inclosed a letter to Nelson and had reposed in that -youth’s coat pocket. On the blank side a few words had been laboriously -scrawled with a pencil. - -“‘I gess this wil tech you Not to But in,’” read Bob slowly. - -“What’s that mean?” asked Dan. - -“Search me,” said Nelson. “Who’s butted in?” - -“Du-du-don’t you su-su-su-see?” cried Tom. “I-i-i-it’s the fu-fu-fellow -that su-su-stole the su-su-su-su----!” - -“Silver! That’s right, Tommy!” cried Dan. “That’s just who did it. And -I said yesterday I was glad he’d got away! I wish one of you chaps -would kick me!” - -“He was probably hiding in the woods here and saw us undress,” said -Bob. “I wish----” - -“I wish I had hold of him again,” said Nelson angrily. “What’ll we do?” - -“Get to the nearest town as soon as we can and report it to the -police,” replied Bob. - -“Where is the nearest town? Couldn’t we find a telephone somewhere -around? How about those houses over there?” - -“It would be a good two miles around there, I guess,” said Bob, -consulting his map. “And there’s some sort of a town about a mile and a -half ahead of us. We’d better light out for there.” - -“All right,” said Nelson. - -“I’m glad he left us our clothes, anyhow,” said Dan. “And look, maybe -we can find which way he went. Here, Barry, seek him out! Get after -him, sir!” - -Barry whined and sniffed and ran around, but every time he started off -on the trail he lost it and had to come back. - -“Seems to me,” said Tom, “if I had a watchdog I’d make him watch.” - -“Maybe he’s lost his watch, like the rest of us,” said Nelson -soothingly. “Come on; I’m ready. What’s the odds, anyhow? It’s all in -the day’s work--or rather walk. We’ll feel fine after we’ve had some -lunch.” - -“Lunch!” sniffed Tom, struggling with his trousers. “Lunch! Where are -we going to get it, I’d like to know?” - -“Oh, we’ll find something in this village Bob’s talking about.” - -“Wu-wu-wu-well, s’posing we du-du-do? How we gu-gu-gu-going to -pu-pu-pu-pay for it?” - -“By Jove!” muttered Nelson blankly. “I hadn’t thought of that!” - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -SHOWS THEM BOTH HUNGRY AND SATISFIED - - -It was a very subdued quartet that took the road to Clearwater, the -nearest village, although, after they had walked along in silence for -a few hundred yards, Dan’s face began to clear and the corners of his -mouth stole upward as he glanced at his companions. I don’t think -that Barry meant to seem heartless or unsympathetic, but his conduct -would have looked, to one unacquainted with his real nature, decidedly -callous. He chased birds and squirrels, tried to climb trees, dug for -mice, and barked and scampered just as though there was no such thing -as misfortune in all the world. And only Dan, I think, understood and -sympathized with him. - -They walked rapidly and before long reached Clearwater. In spite of -the fact that the map made it appear to be quite a village, Clearwater -proved to be merely a collection of some half dozen houses surrounding -the junction of two roads. There was neither store nor hotel there. -They asked information at the first house they came to. To find an -officer, they were told, it would be necessary to go on to Millford, -two miles beyond, although if they liked they could telephone -there. Bob thanked the man and was conducted to the telephone. In a -few minutes he had supplied the officers at Millford with all the -information possible and had described the stolen property. He promised -also to see the officers when he reached Millford. After that there was -nothing to do but keep on for that town. - -“We’ll find a telegraph office there,” said Bob, “and Dan can wire his -father for some money. Then we’ll go to a hotel, tell them how we’re -fixed, and get them to trust us until the money comes.” - -As no one had a better one to offer, that plan was adopted. But it -was weary work, that last two miles. They were all extremely hungry; -indeed, Tom looked so famished that the others almost expected to see -him expire before their eyes. Nelson became temporarily unbalanced, if -Dan is to be believed, and muttered incoherent things about roast beef -and mashed potatoes. It was three o’clock and after when they at last -wandered into Millford. It was a tiny village, but there were stores -there, a telegraph office, and a hotel. They came to the telegraph -office first, and so they went in and Dan wrote his telegram. - - “Money stolen. Please wire fifty dollars this office. All - well. DAN.” - -That was the message, and, as Bob couldn’t suggest any improvements, -it was handed to the operator. The latter counted the words. - -“Twenty-five cents,” he said. - -“Send collect, please,” said Dan. - -“What’s your address?” - -“We haven’t any yet. We’re going to the hotel.” - -“Hotel’s closed; closed first of the month.” - -Dan looked at Bob, and Bob looked at Dan; and then they looked at -Nelson and Tom. - -“Closed!” muttered Dan finally. - -“Is there a boarding house here we can go to?” asked Bob. - -“I don’t believe so; never heard of any,” answered the operator. - -“Well--you’ll send that message, won’t you?” asked Dan anxiously. The -operator hesitated. - -“It’s against the rules,” he objected. “If you lived here I might.” - -“It will be all right,” said Dan. “It’s to my father, and that’s his -address there. We’ve lost every cent of our money, and I don’t know how -we’re going to get any more unless that message reaches him.” - -“Well--all right. I guess I can send it for you. You guarantee charges, -do you?” - -“Yes,” said Dan. “And we’ll come around in the morning for the answer. -I’m awfully much obliged.” - -“Where is the nearest place we could get lodgings and something to -eat?” asked Bob. - -“I don’t believe there’s a place nearer than Port Adams, and that’s -about four miles from here. There’s a hotel there.” - -“Gosh!” muttered Tom. - -They thanked the operator again and went out. Then began a search for a -boarding place that lasted for half an hour. They heard of one lady who -had a room which she sometimes rented and they went to her posthaste. -But the room was taken. At the end of the half hour they had seemingly -exhausted the possibilities of Millford and were still without shelter. - -“How about the police folks?” asked Tom. - -“I’d forgotten all about them,” answered Bob. “Maybe they’ll let us -sleep in the police station.” - -But the police station proved to be only a couple of small rooms in -the townhall. They told their story all over again, gave their home -addresses, and departed with little hope of ever seeing their property -again. For it was evident that the officer suspected them of trying -to work a hoax on him, and his promises to look for the robber didn’t -sound very enthusiastic. Out on the sidewalk they held a council of -war. Bob was for keeping on to Port Adams where the hotel was, but none -of the others agreed with him. - -“I couldn’t walk four miles farther this afternoon if there was a -million dollars in it,” asserted Dan. - -And Nelson and Tom echoed the sentiment. - -“Besides,” said Nelson, “maybe if we went there they wouldn’t take us -at the hotel, and we wouldn’t be any better off.” - -“And we’d have to walk back here in the morning to get the money,” -added Tom. - -“All right,” said Bob. “What will we do, then?” - -But no one offered a suggestion. Instead they stood and stared -dejectedly across the street. Even Barry appeared to have lost spirit; -there was a weary air in the way he held his stump of a tail. On the -other side of the street a fence was placarded with highly colored -circus posters. “Millford, Sept. 9,” was the legend they bore. That was -to-morrow. - -“If we get that money,” said Nelson, “let’s stay and see the circus.” - -“Never mind about the circus,” said Bob irritably. “What we’ve got to -do is to find some place to sleep.” - -“And something to eat,” added Tom sadly. - -“Let’s sleep outdoors,” said Dan. “It’s going to be fairly warm -to-night, I guess.” - -“But how about food?” asked Bob. - -“Let’s go to a house and ask them to feed us,” suggested Tom. “Tell -them we’ll pay in the morning.” - -“No, sir,” answered Bob. “That’s begging, and I won’t beg.” - -“Nor I,” said Nelson. - -“It isn’t begging if you pay for it,” said Tom indignantly. - -“Well, it sounds a whole lot like it. I’d rather go without eating.” - -“We might draw lots,” said Dan, “and eat one of us.” - -“Wish I was home,” muttered Tom. - -He thrust his hands deep into his trousers pockets and stared -disconsolately across at the circus posters. Then suddenly his face -lighted, he uttered a gurgle, and yanked his left hand out of his -pocket. - -“_Lu-lu-lu-look!_” he sputtered. - -They looked. There in Tom’s palm lay a shining half dollar. - -“Where’d you get it?” they cried. - -“Lu-lu-left pocket. I pu-pu-pu-put it there du-du-day before -yu-yu-yu-yesterday and forgot all abub-ub-ub--all about it!” - -The others searched their own pockets frantically, but were not so -lucky. - -“Say, that’s great!” cried Nelson. - -“You bet!” said Dan. “Are you--are you sure it’s good?” - -“Course it’s good!” said Tom. - -“Gee! Doesn’t half a dollar look big when you’re starving?” said Dan -softly. It was passed around from one to another, all examining it as -though it were a quite unusual object. Bob sighed as it left his hand. - -“It certainly looks good to me,” he muttered. - -“Now, what’ll we do with it?” asked Tom. “I don’t suppose anyone will -give us four suppers for half a dollar.” - -“We might get two for that price,” suggested Dan. “Two of us could get -supper and bring something out to the others.” - -“Well, don’t let Tom go,” laughed Nelson. - -“If only there was some sort of a restaurant in this idiotic place!” -sighed Bob. - -“I tell you!” cried Dan. “We’ll go to a store and buy some grub, pitch -a camp, and cook it ourselves! We can get a lot for fifty cents!” - -“Good scheme!” said Bob. - -“Fine!” said Nelson. - -“Swell!” agreed Tom. “Come on!” - -They sought the main street and the stores. At a market they purchased -a pound of round steak for twenty-five cents, and, in response to Dan’s -hints, the man threw in a good-sized bone for Barry. Farther on they -found a grocery store and spent five cents for a loaf of bread, seven -cents for a quarter of a pound of butter, six cents for a quart of -milk--the groceryman good-naturedly supplying a bottle for it--and five -cents for half a dozen cookies. Thus armed they sought a place to pitch -their camp. Five minutes of walking took them out of the village, and -they soon espied a knoll which promised a suitable spot. They crossed a -field, climbed the knoll, and found an ideal location on the western -side of it. The trees were sparse, but, there was enough undergrowth -here and there to serve as wind-break during the night. The four were -once more themselves and in the highest spirits. Bob took command, and -under his direction the others were set to finding fuel, whittling -sticks for forks, and building the fireplace. By five o’clock the -flames were sending a column of purple smoke up into the still evening -air, and the slice of steak, cut into four portions, was sizzling over -the fire on as many pointed sticks. And Barry was busy with his bone. -In short, life was worth living again. - -Now, if you have never spent the day out of doors and supped at night -in the open with the wood smoke floating about you, you can have no -very definite idea of how good that meal tasted to the Four. The steak -was done to a turn, brown and crisp outside, burned a little about -the edges as every camper’s steak should be, and inside slightly pink -and so full of juice that a napkin, had one happened along, would -have done a land-office business! And then the bread! Well, I suppose -it was just an ordinary loaf, but--it didn’t taste so! There was a -beautiful golden-brown crust all over the outside that broke with a -brittle and appetizing sound. And under the crust was the whitest, -softest, freshest, sweetest bread that ever made the thought of butter -a sacrilege. I don’t mean by that that the butter wasn’t used; it was, -lavishly as long as it lasted; after it was gone it was never missed. -The cookies, too, and the milk, ridiculously rich milk it was, were -simply marvelous. Really, it was astonishing how much better Long -Island food was than any other! And Barry, flat on the ground, both -paws on the big bone and teeth busy, grunted accordantly. - -Before them as they sat in a semicircle about the little fire the -hill sloped down to a broad pasture, here and there overgrown with -bushes and dotted at intervals with low trees. Beyond the pasture was -a swamp closed in on its farther side by a line of woods looking dark -against the saffron evening sky. To their right, perhaps a quarter of -a mile distant, was a farmhouse and buildings, and from the house a -thin filament of blue smoke arose. Now and then a voice reached them; -sometimes a dog barked afar off and Barry lifted his head and listened; -once the _chug-chug_ of an automobile, speeding along the road behind -them, disturbed the silence. - -Conversation was fitful at the best during that meal, for it must be -remembered that they had had no lunch and had done a day’s march. -And after the last morsel had disappeared no one complained of -being uncomfortably full. But they had fared well and there were no -complaints. - -“I don’t know,” said Bob, “but what we’d ought to have kept something -for the morning.” - -“Oh, never mind the morning,” answered Dan. “We’ll have plenty of -money then and we’ll breakfast in state.” - -They fed the fire to keep it alive for the sake of its cozy glow and -then leaned back on their elbows and talked. Barry abandoned his bone -with a satisfied sigh and curled himself up by Dan’s side. Presently -the sunlight faded and a crescent moon glowed brightly behind the -knoll. The chill of evening began to make itself felt, and now they -built up the fire for more practical purposes and edged themselves -nearer. Before it got quite dark they busied themselves preparing for -the night. They cut evergreen branches and piled them high in the lee -of a clump of bushes. The packs were opened and each fellow donned as -much of the extra clothing as was possible, the ponchos serving as -blankets. Toward half-past eight they settled themselves for the night, -burrowing deep into the fragrant branches and lying as close together -as was compatible with comfort. The little fire danced and gleamed, the -crickets sang loudly from all sides, and the slender silver moon sailed -overhead in a purple sky. - -Then Tom fell off to sleep, and the crickets’ song was quickly drowned. - - - - -CHAPTER X - -IN WHICH NELSON SEES STRANGE VISIONS - - -Although it had been fairly mild when they went to sleep, by early -morning the chill had crept under the rubber blankets, and the four -sleepers twisted and turned uneasily, conscious of the cold and yet too -sleepy to awake. Nelson was on the outside and therefore less protected -than the others. At length, unable to endure it any longer, he sat up -and looked about him with heavy eyes. It was beginning to get light, -and the crescent moon, far down in the sky, was becoming dim. The other -three slept on. Barry raised his head above Dan’s shoulder and glanced -gravely across at Nelson. Then, with a sigh, he curled up again and -went back to sleep. - -Nelson’s legs were stiff and aching, and after a moment of indecision -he got up and began to walk around. That warmed him up considerably, -and presently he paused and looked about him over the sleeping world. -Back of the knoll a rosy tinge was creeping upward. The farmhouse -showed no signs of life as yet and the chimney sent no smoke into the -gray sky. And everything was very still. - -And then, of a sudden, from somewhere came a strange sound, a sound -that was utterly at variance with the calm hush of early morning. -Nelson puzzled over it for several moments. It was a sound made up of -many lesser sounds, the sound of moving wheels, of creaking wagons, -of heavy footfalls, of rattling harness, of clanking metal, and, so -Nelson thought, of voices. He looked about him in bewilderment. At the -farmhouse not a sign of life showed, nor did the sound seem to come -from that direction. Nelson turned toward the summit of the little -knoll and listened intently. Then he hurried to the top and--rubbed his -eyes in amazement at what he saw. For a moment he thought that he was -still asleep and dreaming. - -Across the field which lay between him and the road lumbered a huge -shape, black against the lightening sky. For a second it was formless, -gigantic in that half-light. Then Nelson’s eyes served him better, and -he saw that the approaching object was an elephant and that beside -it walked a man. Yet surely he was dreaming! What could an elephant -be doing in the middle of that country field at five o’clock in the -morning? And then, as he looked again toward the road, he found the -explanation. For now, coming from the direction of the town, emerging -from behind the trees which hid the road there and turning into the -field, came a procession of wagons and horses and--yes, surely that -strange-looking thing was a camel! It was all clear enough now. The -circus had arrived! - -Several sections of the fence had been removed, and one by one, with -urging and coaxing, the big boxlike wagons were being driven into the -field. By this time the elephant had reached the end of his journey, -and the attendant had brought him to a stop some fifty yards away from -where Nelson stood and was filling and lighting his pipe. The wagons -lumbered, creaking and jolting, across the grass and were drawn up in -two rows. Then other wagons appeared, flat and low these, and made -straight for the middle of the field. And after that so many things -happened at once and with such amazing celerity that Nelson could only -stand there on the knoll and stare. - -As if by magic a small tent arose at the end of the twin lines of -wagons. Dozens of men hurried hither and thither in squads, carrying -canvas, ropes, poles, with never a sign of confusion. The camel, -its ridiculous head moving from side to side superciliously, was -driven over to where the elephant stood. Men with stakes and mallets -followed, and in a minute the two animals were tethered. By that time -the larger tent was lying stretched over the ground ready for raising. -Fires gleamed near the smaller tent, and there came a rattling of -pots and pans. Still another heap of canvas was dragged from a wagon -and stretched out. Unconsciously Nelson had moved down the hill. The -elephant watched him expectantly with his little eyes as he passed. -Nelson kept on until he stood just outside the scene of operations. -They were raising the big tent now. One end of it suddenly arose -into air; men shouted and hurried; ropes were hauled and tightened, -slackened and made fast; the great mallets rose and fell with -resounding blows; inch by inch, foot by foot, the great gleaming canvas -house took form. From somewhere came an appealing odor of coffee and -frying bacon, and Nelson suddenly discovered that he was very hungry. -He walked toward the fires. - -Those who passed him looked at him curiously but offered no word of -remonstrance. The sun came up behind the distant hills with a leap and -glittered wanly on the tarnished gold carvings of the chariots and -on the pots and pans of the busy cooks. There were two of these, and -a youth of about sixteen was acting as helper. As Nelson approached, -the youth disappeared into the tent with a basket of tin plates and -cups. The flaps were up and Nelson could see a long table formed of -planks in sections resting on wooden trestles. The boy was setting the -table for breakfast. The stoves, of which there were two, were queer -round cylinders of sheet iron which were fed with wood through doors -in front. On one a great copper caldron was already beginning to throw -off steam. On the other an immense frying pan was filled with bacon, -which, as fast as it was done, was removed to other pans upon a near-by -trestle. A wagon was backed up close at hand, and as they worked, the -cooks went to it for salt and pepper and other ingredients, which they -took from drawers and cupboards with which the rear of the wagon was -fitted. It was all very astonishing and interesting to Nelson, and he -looked and looked until presently one of the cooks saw him and spoke. - -“Hello,” he said. - -“Good morning,” answered Nelson. - -“You’re up early,” continued the other, removing the cover from the -caldron for an instant and slamming it back into place. He was a -thickset man with a humorous, kindly face and the largest hands Nelson -thought he had ever seen. - -“Not as early as you,” said Nelson smilingly. - -“No, that’s so. It’s our business, you see. Had your breakfast?” - -“Not yet.” - -“Have a cup of coffee, then?” - -Nelson hesitated. - -“Got plenty of it?” - -“About four gallons,” was the answer. “Here, it’ll warm you up. Toss me -a cup, Joe.” - -The other cook obeyed without taking his attention from the sizzling -bacon, and Nelson’s friend held it under a faucet at the bottom of the -caldron. - -“There you are. Now you want some sugar. We haven’t got the milk out -yet. O Jerry! Bring a spoon and some sugar.” - -“Thank you,” said Nelson as he accepted the tin cup of steaming coffee. -“It smells mighty good.” - -“Well, it ain’t the best in the world,” answered the cook cheerfully, -“but it tastes pretty good on a cold morning. You, Jerry! Oh, here you -are. Pass the sugar to the gentleman.” - -Nelson turned and for the first time had sight of the boy’s face. The -hand which he had stretched forth fell to his side. - -“Why! Hello, Jerry Hinkley!” he cried. - -[Illustration: “‘Why! Hello, Jerry Hinkley!’”] - -“Hello,” responded Jerry with an embarrassed smile. He was quite a -different-looking Jerry already. His hair had been cut, the faded -overalls and blue gingham shirt had given place to a suit of plain, -neat clothes, half-hidden by a long apron, and there was a new -expression of self-reliance in the gray eyes. He shook hands with -Nelson a bit awkwardly, but looked very glad to see him again. - -“What are you doing here, Jerry?” asked Nelson. - -“I’m cook’s boy,” was the answer. “I joined the show last Wednesday, -the day after I seen you. Have some sugar?” - -Nelson helped himself, accepted the proffered tin spoon, and stirred -his coffee. - -“Do you like it?” he asked. “It must be rather a change from the farm.” - -“Yes, I like it first-rate,” said Jerry. - -“I don’t like to interrupt the meeting of old friends,” said the cook -good-naturedly, “but they’ll be in for breakfast in about ten minutes, -Jerry, and if you ain’t ready for ’em they’ll scalp you alive.” - -“I better be goin’,” said Jerry. “Glad I seen you again.” - -“All right,” answered Nelson. “When can I see you? Are you busy all -day?” - -“No; ’long about ten o’clock I generally don’t have much to do.” - -“Good! I’ll look you up then,” said Nelson. “The other fellows will -want to see you too; I’ll bring them along.” - -“Will you?” asked Jerry eagerly from the door of the tent. “That’s -mighty kind of you. Good-by. I--I’ll look for you.” - -“Know Jerry, do you?” asked the cook as he pulled a box of tin cups -toward him and began setting them on a trestle. Nelson told of their -former meeting, sipping the boiling hot coffee the while. - -“Well, Jerry’s a pretty good boy,” said the cook. “Tends to his work -and ain’t got no highfalutin’ nonsense about bein’ too good for it. -Come around and see us again.” - -“Thanks,” said Nelson. “I will. And I’m awfully much obliged for that -coffee; it went right to the spot.” - -“Knew it would. Have some more? No? Well, so long.” - -Nelson turned away and retraced his steps. The coffee had warmed him -up, and he wished the others could have some. He stopped one of the -canvasmen and asked the time. - -“Twenty-five minutes after six,” said the man, consulting a big nickel -watch. - -Nelson thanked him and went on. But it wouldn’t do to wake up the -others yet, for, of course, the telegraph office wouldn’t be open -before eight, and they wouldn’t want to wait around without any -breakfast. So instead of joining them he turned and looked about him. -The big tent was up, and so was the dressing tent alongside. The -ticket seller’s box was set up beside the main entrance, and men were -stretching a forty-foot length of painted canvas across some upright -poles. He walked toward them and watched. When finally in place the -canvas advertised the attractions of the side show. There was a highly -colored picture of “Princess Zoe, the Marvelous Snake Charmer.” The -princess was an extraordinarily beautiful young lady and was depicted -standing in a regular chaos of writhing snakes, while two others proved -their subjugation by twining themselves caressingly about her arms and -neck. Then there was a picture of “Boris, the Wild Man of the Tartary -Steppes.” Nelson didn’t find Boris especially attractive. According to -the picture he was a squat gentleman with a good deal of hair on his -face, a remarkably large mouth, a flat nose pierced by a brass ring, -and an expression of extraordinary ferocity. Add to that that he was -shown in the act of making his dinner on unappetizing-looking pieces of -raw meat, and you will understand Nelson’s lack of enthusiasm. Queen -Phyllis, the fortune teller, while not particularly beautiful, was much -more pleasing to look upon. The last picture was that of “Zul-Zul, the -Celebrated Albino Prima Donna,” singing before the crowned heads of -Europe. Having exhausted the fascinations of Zul-Zul, Nelson wandered -unchallenged into the main tent and found a squad of men erecting -the seats. Even that palled after awhile, and he went out again and -walked through the lane formed of the chariots and wagons. The cages -were still boarded up, but the legends outside threw some light on the -identity of the occupants. “Numidian Lion,” he read; “Asiatic Zebra,” -“Black Wolves,” “Royal Bengal Tiger.” Now and then a cage would rock -on its springs as its occupant moved about, and sometimes a snarl or a -grunt reached his ears. A strip of canvas festooned the big tent on the -roadside and bore the inscription in big black letters: - - +---------------------------+ - | MURRAY AND WIRT’S | - | MAMMOTH COMBINED SHOWS. | - | | - | AMERICA’S GREATEST CIRCUS | - | AND HIPPODROME! | - +---------------------------+ - -At a little after seven, having seen all that was to be seen at -present, he returned to the camp. On his way he stopped for a look at -the elephant and camel, which were breakfasting on a bale of hay. In -broad daylight the elephant was distinctly disappointing. He wasn’t -much larger than the camel, as far as height and length went, but there -was a good deal more of him. He was secured by a short chain which led -from an iron ring around one hind foot to a stake driven in the ground. -He ate slowly and thoughtfully, with much unnecessary gesticulation -of his trunk. He was sadly deficient in the matter of tusks, for he -showed only one, and that one had been broken off about three inches -from his mouth and looked much in need of cleaning. Yes, Nelson was -disappointed in the elephant. Nor, for that matter, was the camel much -more satisfying. He was a dirty, rusty camel with a malicious gleam in -his little eyes and a forbidding way of snarling his upper lip back -over his discolored teeth. - -“Oh, don’t be so grouchy,” muttered Nelson. “I’m not going to swipe any -of your old hay.” - -When he got back to the knoll he found only Barry fully awake, although -Dan showed symptoms of wakefulness, muttering away at a great rate and -throwing his arms about. While Nelson watched, the expected happened. -One of Dan’s arms descended forcibly on Tom’s nose, and Tom awoke with -an indignant snort. - -“Hello, Nel,” he muttered. “What time is it?” - -“About a quarter after seven, I guess. I can’t tell you exactly, for I -seem to have mislaid my watch.” - -Tom gave his attention to Dan. - -“Here, wake up, you lazy brute!” he cried. “Want to sleep all day?” - -He accompanied this remark with a violent tweak of Dan’s nose, and the -effect was instantaneous. Dan sat up with a start and sent Barry flying -on to Bob. - -“Wh-what’s the matter?” he asked, startled. - -“Time to get up,” said Tom virtuously. - -“That’s right,” agreed Nelson. “Everyone’s eating breakfast.” - -“Huh!” said Tom. “Wish I was.” - -“Who’s eating breakfast?” asked Bob, rolling over with the struggling -terrier in his arms. - -“Well, the elephant and the camel, for two,” answered Nelson. - -“Elephant and cam--!” ejaculated Dan. “Say, that’s what comes of -sleeping in the moonlight. I’ve heard of it before. I wonder if you’re -daffy, too, Bob. Are you? Try and say something sensible and let’s see.” - -“The moonlight can’t have any effect on you,” said Bob significantly. -Dan sighed. - -“You too! I feared it! Say, Nelson, how are the pelicans and the white -mice getting on? Had their hot chocolate yet?” - -“I didn’t see them,” answered Nelson. “But the Numidian lion and the -royal Bengal tiger aren’t up yet.” - -“You don’t say? Dear, dear, most careless of them! Say, Tommy, how -about you? Are you--er--?” Dan tapped his forehead. - -“I will be if I don’t get something to eat pretty soon,” replied Tom -dolefully. “How soon does that telegraph office open?” - -“Eight, I guess,” said Nelson. “Wonder where we can wash up a bit?” - -“How about the farmhouse over there?” suggested Bob. - -“All right, I guess. Let’s break camp and go over. By the way, I saw -Jerry a little while ago.” - -“Jerry who?” asked Tom. - -“Jerry Hinkley.” - -Dan, who had started to get up, sank back again and viewed Nelson with -real concern. - -“What are you talking about?” he demanded. - -“Why, Jerry Hinkley,” answered Nelson with a laugh. “Haven’t forgotten -Jerry, have you?” - -Dan shook his head sorrowfully. - -“No, but you’d better forget him. Joking aside, Nel, what’s the matter -with you?” - -“Oh, nothing. Or--well, the fact is, I thought I saw things; elephants -and camels and--and circuses, you know. I suppose I must have dreamed -it.” - -“Well, rather!” said Dan relievedly. - -“What was Jerry doing?” asked Bob. “Feeding the elephant peanuts or -riding the camel?” - -“He was setting the table,” replied Nelson gravely. - -“Say, you must have had a corking nightmare!” exclaimed Tom. “I did a -little dreaming myself; dreamed I was freezing to death, for one thing; -but I didn’t see any menageries.” - -“Well, come on, fellows,” said Bob. “Pack up and let’s get a move on. -We’ll get them to loan us some water over at the house and then mosey -toward town. Gee, I’m beastly hungry! Feel as though I hadn’t had a -thing to eat for six weeks.” - -“I had a cup of coffee about an hour ago,” said Nelson musingly. - -“Say, chuck it, will you?” begged Dan earnestly. “You make me feel -creepy, Nel.” - -“Was it hot?” asked Tom in far-away tones as he tied up his pack. - -“Boiling,” answered Nelson. “It was great. I wished you fellows had -been there.” - -“Thanks. Where was it?” asked Bob. “In the Sahara desert?” - -“No; down at the mess tent.” - -“What mess tent? Jerry’s?” - -“Well, he was there. That’s where I met him. It was the circus mess -tent. The cook gave it to me. It was peachy!” - -“Su-say!” cried Tom. “Maybe he isn’t lying, fellows! You know there -was to be a circus here to-day!” - -“Yes, that’s what made Nel dream of ’em,” said Bob. - -But Tom was studying Nelson’s face attentively, and something about his -smile made Tom suspect that he was on the right track. - -“I’ll bu-bu-bet you it’s su-su-su-so!” cried Tom. “Where is it, Nel?” - -“Come on,” said Nelson. - -They followed him up to the brow of the hill. Before them lay the tents -and the wagons, and, nearer at hand, the elephant and the camel were -still quietly eating breakfast. They stared in amazement. - -“Well, I’ll be bu-bu-bu-bu----!” - -“Of course you will, Tommy,” said Nelson soothingly. “Only don’t -explode.” - -“--bu-bu-bu-blowed!” ended Tom triumphantly. “Wouldn’t that -cu-cu-cu-craze you?” - -Then Nelson had to tell them all about it. - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -IN WHICH JERRY TELLS HIS STORY AND DAN PROVIDES DINNER - - -They dragged Dan away from the elephant and set out for the town and -the telegraph office. - -“I hope the money is there,” said Tom. “Of course I want to eat, but -to stay here where there’s a circus and not be able to get in would be -worse than starving.” - -“And such a bee-oo-tiful elephant,” sighed Dan. “I could look for hours -at that elephant and watch him curl his trunk up. Why weren’t we made -with trunks, do you suppose?” - -“I suppose little boys like Tommy would only have suit cases?” inquired -Bob. - -“Robert, that is a bum joke,” answered Dan severely. “Only the -consideration that you are weak and faint from want of food restrains -me from punishing you severely. Also Nel.” - -“What have I done?” - -“It’s what you didn’t do. You didn’t wake me up when the circus walked -into our bedroom. Don’t you think I like to see camels and lions and -things as well as you do? And hot coffee too! You were pretty mean to -have all that fun by yourself.” - -“That’s what!” concurred Tom. - -“Well, there’s the telegraph office,” said Bob. “Say, fellows, -supposing--supposing it hasn’t come!” - -“Maybe it hasn’t--yet,” said Dan anxiously. “It’s only a little after -eight, and if dad didn’t send it last night----” - -“We ought to have said ‘Send immediately,’” interrupted Bob regretfully. - -“That’s so,” agreed Tom; “immediately, if not sooner. But pshaw, why, I -can just smell that money!” - -“Wish I could smell the breakfast,” laughed Nelson. “Here we are.” - -“Good morning,” said Dan. “Anything here for me?” - -The operator shook his head. - -“Nothing yet,” he answered. - -They looked disappointed, and he added: - -“Brooklyn’s sort of slow this morning, though; maybe your message is -coming.” - -“It’s more the money I want than the message,” said Dan. - -“Oh, well, the money wouldn’t be likely to get here for an hour or so -yet. When was it sent?” - -“I don’t know. Last night, I hope.” - -“If it was sent last night it ought to be here now,” said the operator. - -“What’ll we do?” asked Dan. - -“I’m going back to the circus,” said Tom. “If I’ve got to starve I’d -rather do it there where I can keep my mind off my troubles.” - -“So am I,” said Nelson. - -“I guess we might as well all go,” said Dan. “I’ll come back in an -hour,” he added to the operator. “It ought surely to be here by that -time, don’t you think?” - -“I should think so,” answered the operator. “Sorry I haven’t got it for -you now.” - -“Thanks. It isn’t your fault, though. Come on, fellow-poverns.” - -“What’s a povern?” asked Tom. - -“It’s a chap who hasn’t any money,” answered Dan glumly, “like you and -me, Tommy, and Bob and Nelson--and Barry.” - -“Oh,” said Tom disappointedly; “I thought maybe it was something to -eat. I guess I was thinking of muffins.” - -“Don’t do it; that way lies madness.” - -When they turned into the circus grounds again they put Barry back -on his leash, for he showed a most unchristian attitude toward the -elephant and camel. For an hour they wandered about or sat on some -packing boxes at the back of the dressing tent and tried to forget -that they were hungry. Then Dan and Barry left them and set off for -the telegraph office once more. By that time the scene had become -animated again. The horses were being hitched to the wagons and -chariots, performers in costume were issuing from the dressing tent, -and the elephant and camel were being decked in spangled red blankets. -Tom made inquiries and learned that there was to be a parade through -Millford and on a mile farther to where the summer colony was situated. -Things were quite exciting for the next half hour and when all was in -readiness the boys went down to the road to watch the procession pass -out. - -First there was an intensely dignified gentleman in hunting costume, -pink coat, high hat, and all, who rode ahead on a big white horse. -Then came the band, eight dejected-looking men in red tunics sitting -in a boat-shaped barge. After them followed the elephant conducted by -an Irishman in Arab dress who carried a short spear. The elephant’s -name, if the faded red blanket was to be believed, was Hercules. -The blanket said so in large letters. But the Irish Arab called -him “Charlie.” A lady with golden hair, attired in a flowing white -costume of cheesecloth made up according to the fashions prevailing -in Greece many centuries ago, stood in a golden chariot and drove -three well-behaved black horses abreast. A second chariot, drawn -by three bay horses, was presided over by a red-faced gentleman in -Roman costume. A line of animal cages followed. Then came a small -pony cart hauled by a black-and-white pony and driven by a clown, -a very sad-looking individual indeed. More cages, many empty; a -calliope with the musician smoking a big black cigar; a float upon -which five white-cheesecloth-attired ladies sat in various attitudes -of discomfort; two lady jockeys driving white horses in tandem; -more clowns, one riding a donkey and the others occupying a small -carriage; the camel ridden by a man in a pair of baggy blue trousers -and a green jacket; three trick ponies led by small boys; an ancient -barouche occupied by four gentlemen in full dress and bearing placards -advertising the show. That was the last of it. It trailed slowly away -in the direction of the village, and the boys slipped off the fence. - -“Let’s go and find Jerry,” suggested Nelson. “He said he wasn’t busy at -ten, and I guess it must be pretty near that time now. Gee, but I miss -my watch!” - -“And I miss my money,” said Tom. - -“Wait a minute,” said Bob. “Here comes Dan. Did you get it, Dan?” - -Dan shook his head sadly. - -“Thunder!” muttered Tom. - -“Do you suppose your father’s away?” asked Bob. - -“I don’t believe so. He doesn’t very often go away. Anyhow, mother -would be pretty sure to open the message.” - -“I think one of us had better telegraph,” said Nelson. - -“Wait until noon,” said Bob. - -“We’ll be starved by that time,” objected Tom. - -“Look here, fellows,” said Dan. “If that money doesn’t come by twelve -o’clock, I’ll get some dinner for you.” - -“How?” - -“I don’t know how yet. But I’ll do it, so don’t you worry. I’m mighty -sorry, and I don’t see what the trouble can be.” - -“Oh, don’t bother,” said Bob, noting Dan’s downcast looks. “We’ll do -well enough. Who wants to eat, anyway?” - -“Not I,” said Nelson. “Food has no attraction for me; I’m above it.” - -“It’s bad for the digestion,” added Tom. “Let’s find Jerry. Maybe he’ll -present us with a crust of bread.” - -“If you ask him for food,” threatened Bob, “I’ll lick you, Tommy, till -you can’t stand up--or sit down either, for that matter.” - -“Who’s going to ask him?” muttered Tom. “I was only in fun.” - -They found Jerry sitting on one of the trestles outside the mess tent -reading a book. When they hailed him he laid the book aside rather -hurriedly, but later Nelson caught a glimpse of the cover. It was a -battered arithmetic. Jerry shook hands all around and was formally -introduced to Barry, and they climbed to the trestle beside him and -asked dozens of questions. Above all they wanted to know how Jerry came -to be with the circus. - -“It sort of happened,” he said. “The day after you all was at the farm, -dad sent me over to Newbury with a load of hay for the circus. I got -there about eight o’clock and after I’d thrown the load off I hitched -the horses and looked around a bit. And I happened to get along to the -mess tent just when Mr. Foley--that’s the head cook and the man that -gave you the coffee--was tellin’ Mr. Wirt--he’s one of the proprietors, -you know--that he wouldn’t work another day without a boy to help him. -You see, the boy they had before I came, had run away two days before, -when they was showing at Flushing. So after the boss went away I up and -asked Mr. Foley did he want a boy. He said he did, and I said I’d like -the job. He looked me over and said for me to go and see Mr. Wirt. So I -seen Mr. Wirt, and he hired me. Then I drove the hayrick home and came -back in the afternoon.” - -“That was slick,” said Tom. “Do you like it?” - -“Yes, I like it. It’s kind of hard, but Mr. Foley and Mr. Jones are -mighty good to me. I get three dollars and a half a week and plenty to -eat.” - -“Did your father want you to go?” asked Nelson. - -Jerry shook his head. - -“No; but after I’d explained to him he didn’t mind--much. You see, -it’s kind of lonesome for dad without me there. But I told him I had to -earn some money because I was going to school next year, and he said it -was all right. Course I ain’t goin’ to stay here all winter. The show -goes South next month, and I’m goin’ to quit then. I got a place on a -farm promised me in October, over near Barrington.” - -“That’s fine,” said Nelson. “You still intend to go to Hillton?” - -“Yes. Do you--do you think I could?” - -“Of course you can,” answered Nelson heartily. “Only--you’d better -study whenever you get a chance.” - -“I’m goin’ to.” - -“It would be nice,” said Dan, “if you could go to one of the schools -around here this winter.” - -“Yes; I thought of that,” answered Jerry, “but I couldn’t do it, I -guess; leastways, not if I was to make any money. And I got to have -money,” he added doggedly. - -Dan looked inquiringly at Nelson and Bob, but each shook his head, -counseling silence as to their conspiracy. - -“Does the circus make much money?” asked Tom. - -“I guess so,” Jerry replied. “Sometimes we don’t have very big crowds, -and then again sometimes we have to pack ’em into the tent like oats -in a grain bin. A good deal depends on the weather, they say. They’re -sort of lookin’ for a big crowd this afternoon an’ a slim one to-night. -This ain’t a very good show place, Mr. Foley says, but it’s better to -make a little here than to miss a performance, like we’d have to do if -we went right on to Patchogue.” - -Jerry put his hand in his pocket and brought out four soiled oblongs of -red pasteboard. - -“I thought maybe you fellers would like to go,” he said, handing the -admission tickets to Dan. “Those ain’t for reserved seats, but the -reserves ain’t much better’n the others, far’s I can see.” - -“That’s awfully kind of you,” said Dan, and the others echoed his -sentiment. - -“Can you get all the tickets you want?” asked Nelson. - -“N-no,” answered Jerry; “they don’t give many away.” - -“Well, they must like you, Jerry, to give you all these,” said Tom. - -Jerry studied his hands a moment. - -“I--they didn’t exactly give me them,” he owned finally. - -“Do you mean that you bought them?” asked Tom. - -“Yes; but ’tain’t anything,” Jerry responded with elaborate -carelessness. - -“But--but--!” stammered Tom. - -Nelson reached across with his foot and kicked Tom’s shin. - -“It’s mighty good of you, Jerry,” he said gratefully. “Are you going to -be there?” - -“Somewheres about, I guess.” - -“Well, couldn’t you go with us and--and sort of explain things?” - -Jerry’s face lighted eagerly. - -“Guess I could if you want me to,” he answered. - -“All right. We’ll look for you here, then. What time does it begin?” - -“Half-past two. I’ll be here and I’ll look for you. You won’t see as -good a show as usual, though,” he continued apologetically. “You see, -we ain’t got Donello any more. He left us day before yesterday.” - -“Who’s he?” asked Bob. - -“He’s the fellow does the high dive,” answered Jerry. “Ain’t you seen -the show bills? He climbs up a ladder on to a little platform about -thirty feet in the air an’ dives into a tank an’ turns a somersault -comin’ down. The bills say that there ain’t but three feet of water in -the tank, but that ain’t so, ’cause the tank’s set down in the ground -about two feet. It’s a fine trick, that is, an’ the first time I seen -it I was most scared to death. But he an’ Mr. Murray had a quarrel, an’ -he lit out. Mr. Murray’s been telegraphin’ around ever since tryin’ to -get some one to take his place, but I guess he ain’t found anyone.” - -“How far did you say he dives?” asked Dan. - -“’Bout thirty feet, but it looks a lot more. An’ when he gets up there -he says ‘Ready!’ in a little squeaky voice that sounds like he was -about a mile away. An’ then the drums beat an’ he comes down headfirst -a ways. Then he flips himself over, an’ the ringmaster he shouts ‘In -mid-air!’ an’ then Donello he comes plump into the tank headfirst; an’ -everyone sets up a shoutin’ an’ a clappin’. It’s certainly”--Jerry -searched for a word--“in-_spi_-rating.” - -“It must be,” said Dan gravely. “I wonder what time it is.” - -Jerry looked up at the sun. - -“’Bout eleven, I guess,” he answered. “I got to get to work. The -parade’ll be back in about half an hour, an’ we have dinner at -half-past twelve.” - -“Well, we’ll meet you here at about a quarter past two,” said Nelson as -they slid off the trestle. - -“What’ll we do now?” asked Tom. - -“Guess I’ll go back to the telegraph office,” said Dan. - -“We’ll all go,” said Nelson. “Then if the money’s there we can find -some place to have some dinner. We don’t want to miss the show. Isn’t -Jerry a corker?” - -“He’s all right, Jerry is,” agreed Bob. “What was that word of his? -Inspi----?” - -“In-_spi_-rating,” answered Tom, laughing. “I wish Donello, or whatever -his name is, was going to do his stunt. It sounds pretty fine.” - -“Shucks!” said Nelson, “that isn’t very much. Why, look here, Dan, -you’ve done twenty-five feet often up at camp. And as for turning -somersaults----!” - -“That’s all right,” responded Tom warmly, “but I’ll bet you couldn’t do -it, nor Dan either. It’s one thing to dive into a lake where there’s -twelve feet of water and another to dive into a little old tank.” - -“Five feet’s as good as twelve,” answered Dan calmly. - -“Not for me it isn’t,” said Tom. - -“I know, Tommy; it takes more water to float you.” - -“Huh!” grunted Tom. “I can beat you floating!” - -“I don’t believe you could sink if you tried,” said Dan. - -“Then what did you just su-su-say it took more water----” - -“Shut up, you fellows,” interrupted Bob. “Here’s the office. Let’s -learn the worst.” - -It was soon learned. The operator shook his head before Dan could ask a -question. Tom groaned loudly. - -“I’ll stay here awhile,” said Dan soberly. “You fellows go on back if -you want to. I’ll be there at a little after twelve.” - -“Well, all right,” said Nelson. “Only if you don’t hear by that time -I’d better telegraph to my folks. Supposing I write out a message now? -Then if you don’t get any word you can send it.” - -So Nelson wrote a demand for fifty dollars “_immediately_,” -underscoring the “immediately,” although, as Bob pointed out, the -operator couldn’t send italics. - -“I don’t care,” replied Nelson. “It gives me satisfaction.” - -They left Dan and, after sauntering around the streets of the little -village for a while, returned to the circus field in the wake of the -parade. On the way they paused to admire a lithograph of “Donello, -Prince of High Divers, in his Perilous Plunge of Fifty Feet into -Thirty-six Inches of Water!” - -“But, look here,” objected Tom, “how many of him are there?” - -Sure enough, according to the lithograph there were three distinct -Donellos. One was poised on the little platform at the summit of the -ladder, while two others were turning somersaults on the way down to -the tiny tank. - -“Oh, that’s just poetic license,” explained Nelson. “It shows him at -various points in the trip. It’s the same chap, see? Blue-black hair, -pink tights, and a green velvet thingumbob around the middle of him.” - -“All the same,” answered Tom, “it’s a lie, that picture.” - -“As far as I can see,” responded Bob sadly, “circus posters are most -all lies. I guess if they just showed what there really was to see no -one would go.” - -“Sure,” said Nelson. “Besides, they’re mighty interesting lies. I -suppose a circus man’s got as much right to tell lies in his pictures -as authors have to write them in books.” - -“It isn’t the same,” objected Tom. “Authors don’t tell lies to get your -money out of you, and circuses do.” - -“No; authors get your money first,” laughed Bob. - -“Besides,” Tom continued, “that poster says fifty feet, and Jerry says -it’s only thirty.” - -“Poetic license again, Tommy,” said Nelson soothingly. - -“It isn’t right, though,” was the stubborn response. - -“Well, don’t you care, old chap; it isn’t your fault.” - -“Hunger is driving Tommy into a frightful condition of pessimism,” said -Bob. - -“Wish I had a fried egg,” said Tom gloomily. - -“Yes, all kind of golden on top and brownish around the edges,” -supplemented Bob with a grin. - -“Oh, cut it out,” sighed Nelson. “You’re making me have spasms inside. -I suppose we might go and stand around the cook until he offered us -something to eat to get rid of us, but it would be pretty low down.” - -“Couldn’t be any lower down than I feel right now,” said Tom. - -“Oh, I guess Dan’ll get the money this time,” said Bob hopefully. - -They found a comfortable place in the sun and stretched themselves out -to wait. Nelson said he was going to try to go to sleep and forget -it. But he didn’t succeed. It was long past noon when Barry pounced on -them and heralded Dan’s approach. They sat up quickly and looked the -question none dared to ask. Dan shook his head smilingly. Tom rolled -over on the grass and muttered. Even Bob lost his temper for an instant. - -“You needn’t look so thundering pleased about it,” he growled. - -Dan laughed and tossed something at him. Bob snatched it up. It was a -two-dollar bill. - -“What did you lie for?” he demanded. - -“I didn’t,” answered Dan. “The money hasn’t come, nor any message -either. But there’s enough for dinner.” - -“Wh-wh-wh-wh-where--” began Tom. - -“You needn’t ask where it came from,” said Dan, “because I’m not going -to tell you. But I got it honestly, and all you’ve got to do now is to -find something to eat.” - -“It sounds good to me,” said Nelson, jumping up. Bob and Tom joined -him, eying Dan curiously. - -“Aren’t you coming?” asked Bob. Dan shook his head. - -“I’ve had mine,” he answered lightly. - -“I’ll bet you haven’t! Don’t be an ass, now; there’s more than enough -for the four of us.” - -“Honor bright, I have, Bob.” - -“Where?” - -“I won’t tell you. Go on and get your dinners, you chaps, and I’ll tell -you all about it later. And--er--do you mind taking Barry with you? I -don’t believe he had enough.” - -“Will you be here when we come back?” asked Nelson suspiciously. - -“Yes, somewheres around,” was the careless answer. - -“There’s something mighty funny about it,” grumbled Tom as they took -themselves off, Barry following unwillingly at the end of the leash. - -“You bet there is,” answered Nelson. “Dan’s been up to mischief, that’s -what!” - -“Well, he says it’s all right,” said Bob cheerfully, “and Dan doesn’t -lie. I vote we get some dinner and----” - -“Hold on a bit!” cried Nelson. “Let me see that bill.” - -He took it and looked it over carefully. Then he gave a sigh of relief. - -“It seems to be all right,” he said. “I didn’t know but what it might -be a fake or something. You never can tell what Dan will do.” - -“That’s so,” the others agreed. - -And a few hours later they were more certain of it than ever. - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -WITNESSES THE FIRST APPEARANCE OF “DANELLO” - - -They found their dinners at the first house they applied at, and good, -generous dinners they were. At a quarter of two they were returning -to the circus ground, and not alone. The vicinity for two weeks past -had been well sprinkled with glowing posters advertising “America’s -Greatest Circus and Hippodrome,” and now the result was in evidence. -The road to the field was lined with pedestrians and filled with -vehicles. The mud-specked family carryall of the farmer or the spring -wagon with boards forming extra seats for the accommodation of a large -family rubbed hubs with the natty phaeton or rubber-tired station ’bus -from the summer settlement. That thoroughly American vehicle, the -buggy, showed the national spirit of independence by rattling along in -the way of impatient and arrogant English carts and supercilious French -touring cars. Tom’s eyes hung out of his head. - -“I didn’t know there were so many people on the whole island!” he -exclaimed. - -“They’ll have a full house this afternoon, all right,” said Nelson. - -When they reached the field they had difficulty in working their way -over to the mess tent, so great was the throng. The side show was being -liberally patronized. In the shade of the pictured canvas a man, in a -high silk hat and wearing a flannel shirt with a large yellow diamond -in it, stood upon a box and pointed out the attractions with a long -stick. - -“This way, ladies and gentlemen!” he cried. “Don’t forget the Side -Show, the Palace of Mysteries, the Greatest Aggregation of Natural -Curiosities ever placed before the American Public. Step up, ladies and -gentlemen! It is only ten cents, a dime, the tenth part of a dollar! -’Twill neither make nor break! The Performance in the Main Tent does -not begin for half an hour. You have plenty of time to visit the Hall -of Wonders! See the Snake Charmer in her wonderful demonstration -of Psychic Force! A beautiful young girl who handles the deadly -rattlesnake, the formidable boa constrictor, and the treacherous Indian -Cobra as a child fondles a kitten! Only a dime, ten cents! See Boris, -the Wild Man of the Tartary Steppes! Lives on raw flesh, sleeps but one -hour in the twenty-four, and speaks no word of any known language! A -puzzle to the Scientists of all Countries! Listen to the Albino Patti, -whose voice has the greatest range of any singer in the world and has -delighted the ears of Royalty all over the Civilized Globe! Step up! -Step up! Step up! Have your fortunes told by Queen Phyllis! Tells the -past and the future! Reads your mind like an open book! Advises you in -affairs of business for the ridiculously small price of fifteen cents. -The greatest Fortune Teller of the Age! This way to the Side Show! Step -up! Step up! Step up! Step up!” - -Tom listened with open mouth. - -“Let’s go in,” he whispered. “We’ve got half a dollar yet.” - -“Oh, come on,” laughed Nelson, dragging him forcibly away from the -enticing “barker” and the lurid canvas. “It’s nearly quarter past, and -we’ve got to find Jerry.” - -They pushed their way through the jostling throng, seeking the mess -tent. Since morning dealers in lemonade, sandwiches, photographs, -souvenir post cards, and many other things had set up their tables. A -five-cent photograph tent was doing a rushing business, and a man with -a cane-toss outfit was fast becoming rich. Bob wanted to linger at the -post-card booth, but Nelson pulled him away only to discover the next -instant that they had lost Tom. He was discovered finally, watching -the efforts of a country youth to capture a pocket-knife by throwing a -wooden ring over the head of a cane. - -“Say, Bob, lend me ten cents, will you?” he begged. “I’ll just bet I -can do that!” - -“No, sir,” answered Bob firmly; “you come along here.” - -Eventually they reached the mess tent and found Jerry awaiting them. - -“Have you seen Dan?” they asked. - -“Dan?” repeated Jerry, looking about as though that youth might be -hidden under the wagon or the trestles. “He ain’t here. Have you lost -him?” - -“We left him an hour ago and he promised to be around here, but he -didn’t say where. I thought maybe he was with you,” answered Nelson. -Jerry shook his head again. - -“No, he ain’t here.” - -“Well, we’ll wait awhile. Maybe he’ll turn up if he hasn’t got lost.” - -But he didn’t, and when the strains of the band reached them from the -big tent Tom refused to sit still a moment longer. - -“Come on,” he said impatiently. “He’s got his ticket. Maybe he’s in -there now. We’re missing half the fun.” - -So, led by Jerry, who seemed strangely excited for a boy who had been -part and parcel of the show for several days, they made their way to -the main tent, Nelson carrying Barry in his arms to keep him from -being walked on. They fought their way through the narrow entrance and -found seats near the end of the tent. There was one ring and a stage. -Suddenly Tom nudged Nelson. - -“Look, I’ll bet they’ve got Donello back,” he said. “See there? That’s -the ladder and the tank like pictures show them.” - -“Yes,” said Jerry; “I heard they’d found a fellow to take Donello’s -place, but it ain’t Donello himself. Here comes the grand march.” - -The curtains at the far end of the tent were pulled aside, and a -procession of horses and chariots and animals entered and lumbered -around the tan bark to the martial strains of the overworked band. -Hercules wobbled along in a world-weary way, swaying his trunk as -though keeping time to the music. The camel followed. Tom said he -looked as though he was trying to do a cake walk. Then the three clowns -suddenly appeared, fell over the ropes in time-honored fashion, and -the performance began. It wasn’t a half-bad show, the boys agreed, Bob -pointing out the fact that it was an advantage to have only one ring -because you didn’t get cross-eyed trying to see two or three things at -the same time. The bareback riding was good, the trick roller-skaters -fair, and the clowns quite as funny as clowns ever are. Everybody ate -peanuts and threw the shells on everybody else, the air grew heavy with -dust, and the band played tirelessly. Tom sat with fascinated gaze and -saw everything that went on. Jerry told interesting inside history of -the performers, and was greatly pleased at the evident enjoyment of his -friends. It was the first time in his life that Jerry had ever treated -anybody and acted as host, and he was proud and elated. The afternoon -wore along and the performance with it. The ringmaster mounted the -stage and invited everybody to remain for the Minstrel Show and Popular -Concert to be held immediately after the conclusion of the performance. - -“An amusing, instructive, and moral entertainment,” he declared, -“that no one should miss. Tickets are ten cents apiece. Gentlemanly -agents will now pass through the audience, and all wishing to do so -may purchase tickets to the Concert. Remember, they are but ten cents -apiece. Keep your seats, Ladies and Gentlemen! The best part of the -afternoon’s performance is still to be seen!” - -Whereupon, as if by magic, vociferous men appeared everywhere shouting -“Tickets to the Minstrel Show and Concert! Only ten cents! Tickets -here! Who wants a ticket?” - -“Here he comes!” whispered Jerry excitedly. - -“Who?” asked Nelson. - -“The fellow that’s going to dive,” answered Jerry. “That’s him coming -along there by the ropes. See?” - -But they couldn’t see very well, for Donello’s substitute was at the -other end of the tent from them and various persons intervened. They -did, however, catch sight of a figure in pink fleshings with green -velvet trunks. Then the ringmaster introduced “Signor Donello, the -World-Renowned Aërial Diver,” and the drums rolled while the figure in -pink fleshings bowed gracefully and turned to the ladder. Up he went, -nimbly, hand over hand, until he stood on the tiny two-foot platform -attached to the top of the ladder high up under the creamy canvas roof. -Then he turned and looked down, and for the first time the boys saw his -face. - -Nelson gasped, Bob half rose from his seat, Tom shouted: - -“_Dan!_” - -Nelson pulled him back to his seat. - -“Shut up, you idiot!” he whispered hoarsely. “He’ll hear you and get -nervous.” - -“Bu-bu-bu-but he’ll bu-bu-bu-break his nu-nu-neck!” cried Tom. - -“Not Dan,” answered Nelson, but with more confidence than he felt. -“Just the same, it’s a fool stunt.” - -“He ought to be licked,” growled Bob nervously. - -“Do you think he’s tried it?” asked Nelson. - -“Yes; he practiced before the tent opened,” said Jerry. “I knew about -it, but he made me promise not to tell.” - -“I’ll bet he did,” said Nelson savagely. “He knew plaguy well we’d have -stopped him. That’s where he got the money he gave us, I guess.” - -“Wh-wh-why don’t he jump?” asked Tom, squirming in his place. “Do you -su-su-suppose he’s scared?” - -“That’s part of it,” explained Jerry. “Donello always did that. It gets -you sort of scared-like and anxious.” - -It certainly did. Tom’s face looked like a piece of white paper. Bob -was scowling at his programme. Even Nelson, in spite of his confidence -in Dan’s ability to do most anything he made up his mind to do, looked -rather miserable. Jerry was the least anxious of the four,--but he had -witnessed the trials. The only entirely unperturbed member of the group -was Barry. Barry was sniffing the mingled odors of the tent with calm -curiosity. - -High up above the ridiculously tiny tank of water, which to the -uninitiated seemed barely deep enough to bathe in, stood Dan. He held -a handkerchief in his hand the while he measured the distance. Then, -carefully, he stepped to the edge of the little ledge, dropped the -handkerchief, which went fluttering slowly down, accentuating the -distance, and let his arms fall straight to his sides. - -There was scarcely a sound throughout the crowded tent. The audience -sat with upturned faces and fast-beating hearts. Tom’s fingers were -gripped fiercely into his legs as he watched with staring fascinated -eyes. Bob was breathing like a steam engine. Nelson, hands stuffed into -pockets, held his underlip between his teeth and made no sound. Barry -was standing in his lap and was now sniffing excitedly, his little nose -pointing toward the figure on the platform and twitching violently. - -The ringmaster held up one gloved hand. The bandmaster raised his baton. - -“_Ready!_” - -The voice sounded a quarter of a mile away, and Nelson shivered. The -pink-clad figure gave a little hop from the edge of the platform and -shot downward like a flash of light. The drums broke into a roll. The -ringmaster cried “_Hi!_” and snapped his long whip. When a third of the -way down “Signor Donello’s” arms shot out and his body revolved. - -“_In mid-air!_” cried the ringmaster exultantly. - -Another drop and again the falling body turned head over heels, while -the drums rolled faster and the cymbals crashed. The new Donello had -beaten the old one at his own trick! The next instant there was a -splash and a cloud of flying spray as the body plunged headfirst into -the tank. - -A gasp of relief arose from the audience, and then the applause -thundered forth, applause which quickly turned to laughter. For, as the -performer climbed over the edge of the tank, a white streak bounded -across the ring and leaped at his face. Barry had found his master. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -WHEREIN THEY MEET THE WILD MAN OF THE TARTARY STEPPES - - -They were talking it over. It was after five o’clock and they were -sitting in the deserted dressing tent, to which Dan, as was his -privilege as a member of “America’s Greatest Circus and Hippodrome,” -had invited them. Barry was curled up in Dan’s lap. Jerry had taken -himself away to his duties. - -“I knew I could do it,” Dan was explaining. “When Jerry told about it -I just made up my mind that if the money didn’t come I’d go to Murray -and ask for the place. And I did. He didn’t think I was quite right in -my mind at first, but I asked him to let me show what I could do, and -finally he agreed. Then”--Dan grinned reminiscently--“then I borrowed -two dollars and a half from him, half the pay for one performance----” - -“Gosh! Did he only give you five dollars for doing that?” asked Tom. - -“Well, I wanted more, but he said he’d only paid Donello five, so I -gave in. Then I had some lunch in the village, found you fellows, gave -you that two dollars, and went to the tent. They had got the ladder and -tank filled up, and I got into my tights. Jerry went with me to see -fair play. He didn’t want me to try it, Jerry didn’t, but I shut him up -and made him promise not to tell you fellows.” - -“Lucky you did,” grunted Bob. - -“That’s what I thought,” laughed Dan. “But, pshaw, it wasn’t any stunt! -Just a straight drop; and there wasn’t any possibility of missing the -tank.” - -“But supposing you had?” asked Nelson quietly. Dan turned and looked at -him a second. - -“Well, then I’d got considerably messed up, I guess,” he answered -soberly. “Well, I tried a dive from about twenty feet up first; the -platform is adjustable, you see; and it went all right. Then I went -clear up and tried it from the top. And that went all right too. It -seemed a long ways down at first, and I wondered whether the tank -would stay there until I got to it. But it did. Then I did it again -and tried a somersault. Murray was tickled to death. ‘You stay with -us,’ he said, ‘and you’ll be making big money in a year or two.’ Then I -thought to myself, what’s the use in doing only one flop when there’s -lots of time for two? I asked Murray, but he didn’t like it at first. -Said Donello was considered one of the best in the business and he was -always satisfied with one turn. But I made up my mind to try it, and I -did. It was dead easy. Murray wanted to hug me. Then he wanted me to -sign a contract for six months and went up on his price; offered me two -hundred dollars a month for two performances daily.” - -“Gee!” gasped Tom. - -“Well, that’s what I thought,” answered Dan with a laugh. “And I had to -think a long while before I got up courage to say no. But that wasn’t -the last of it. He’s after me yet. Maybe he’ll get me after all.” - -“Not if I know it!” said Nelson indignantly. “I’d send for your dad the -first thing. Nice stunts for a chap who’s just out of bed from typhoid -fever!” - -“Just out of bed, your granny! Well, anyway, I’ve agreed to do it again -to-night.” - -“You have!” - -“Yep.” - -“Oh, cut it out,” said Bob. “We’ve got money enough. Besides, maybe -your dad’s telegram is at the office by this time.” - -“I know, but I can’t go back on my promise, and I promised to perform -twice.” - -“Well, don’t you go and try to improve on it,” begged Nelson. “Don’t -try to put in three somersaults instead of two.” - -“By Jove!” exclaimed Dan, grinning, “that’s an idea! I hadn’t thought -of that!” - -“Shut up!” begged Nelson. “If you try that trick you’ll be Done-ello -for sure.” - -“Instead of _Dan_ello,” added Tom. - -“Wasn’t it great about Barry?” asked Nelson. “He was on my lap and I -didn’t know what he was up to until he was kiting across lots with his -leash dangling after him. Did you hear the crowd laugh? Barry made the -hit of the performance.” - -“Well, how about supper? Suppose you fellows come with me. I’m to eat -with the push here, and I guess Murray’ll let you come along if I agree -to pay for you.” - -“That’s dandy!” said Tom. “We’ll eat with Zul-Zul and the Wild Man!” - -“You’d better look out, Tommy,” Bob advised. “Maybe he’ll eat you, -you’re so fat and rosy.” - -So Dan disappeared for a moment, and presently returned with the news -that Murray had given him permission to take the others to supper as -his guests. - -“He’s mighty nice to you, isn’t he?” asked Nelson sarcastically. - -That supper was one of the ever-remembered features of the trip. Jerry -found places for them at one end of the long table, and they looked -about them with frank curiosity. Overhead naphtha torches flared, -throwing deep shadows on the pine boards that formed the table. The -sides of the tent were up here and there, and from without came the -sound of the crickets, the voices of Mr. Foley and his companion at the -stoves, and the scrape and clash of pans and utensils. Inside, the air -became hot and heavy under the shallow curve of canvas, the tin plates -and cups glimmered, the steam drifted up from the hot viands, and the -noise was at first deafening. - -This was the first table, Jerry informed them, and accommodated the -performers and the “staff,” the “staff” being the management. The -canvasmen, drivers, animal men, and the other hands ate later at a -second table. Across from the Four sat the ringmaster, between a -pleasant-faced and rather elderly woman and a thin youth with pale -cheeks whom Nelson recognized as the leader of the “family” of trick -skaters. He wondered who the woman was, and would have been wondering -yet, doubtless, had not his neighbor, a good-natured little Irishman, -come to his assistance. - -“You’re frinds of the laddie that did the jomp?” he asked. - -“Yes,” answered Nelson. “We four are together. We’re taking a walking -trip along the island.” - -“Is thot so? Well, I didn’t see the jomp myself, but I heard the boys -talkin’ about it. ’Twas a pretty lape, they said.” - -“Yes; but I was awfully scared. I was afraid he’d miss the tank.” - -“I suppose so. Is he goin’ to shtay wid the show?” - -“Oh, no; he only joined for to-day.” Nelson told briefly of the robbery -and their subsequent adventures, and the little Irishman chuckled -enjoyably. - -“Sure, ’tis the plucky lad he is. But he’s right, the circus be’s no -place for a gintleman.” - -“Do you belong?” asked Nelson innocently. Then he blushed and stammered -until the Irishman laughed his embarrassment away. - -“Sure, there’s no offinse, me boy. I’m no gintleman. Yes, I belongs to -the show. Now, what would you think I was, sir?” - -Nelson studied him a moment and shook his head. - -“Are you--are you a clown?” - -“Faith, no,” chuckled the other, “’tis not as bad as thot. Was you in -the side show? No? Well, you’d have seen me there if you’d been. They -call me ‘Boris,’ bedad! ’Tis a disgraceful, onchristian name, but it’s -money in me pocket.” - -“Boris? Why, I thought Boris was the--the----” - -“The Wild Mon of the Tar-_tary_ Shteppes? Thot’s me, me lad. Raw mate’s -me shpecialty and I shpake no word of any known language.” - -Nelson glanced at the Wild Man’s plate, well filled with steak and -potatoes, and laughed. The Wild Man joined him. - -“’Tis a faker I am. Me name’s Thomas Cronan an’ I was born in the wilds -of County Clare, which is the grane garden spot of ould Ireland. Sure, -we’re all fakers in the side show. Mrs. Wheet over there is ‘Princess -Zoe’ and does thricks with three ould shnakes thot’s had the shtingers -yanked out of them. She’s a lady, too, me boy, if iver there was one.” - -Nelson, to his surprise, discovered that “Princess Zoe” was the -nice-looking elderly lady at the ringmaster’s right. - -“An’ further along there,” continued his informant, “is ‘Zul-Zul,’ -which her name is Maude Harris. She used to be an equistreen--rode the -horses, you know--till she had a fall and hurted her back. Thin she -blached her hair and now they call her an al-bin-o, which is an ungodly -name to my mind.” - -“She--she sings, doesn’t she?” asked Nelson, observing the young lady -in question. - -“Same as onybody sings, me boy, no more an’ no less.” - -“Oh,” said Nelson. “And do you--like being a Wild Man?” - -“I do an’ I don’t,” responded the other judicially. “’Tis asy money, -but the life’s confinin’. I’m thinkin’ I had the best of it when I was -drivin’ the tent wagon. Thot’s what I used to do. Come an’ see me this -avenin’, an’ bring your frinds. Tell Billy Conly, the feller outside, I -said he was to let you in.” - -“Thanks,” answered Nelson. “And I’ll bring some raw meat with me.” - -“Sure,” answered the Wild Man, laughing as he arose from the table, -“it’s kind of you, me boy, but I could ate no more to-night. We’re -shmall aters on the Tar-_tary_ Shteppes.” - -After supper Nelson and Dan walked to the telegraph office, and this -time found the money awaiting them. There was also a telegram from Mr. -Speede. - -“Away when your message came,” it read. “Have sent fifty. Sorry for -delay. Try and write oftener and send address.” - -“I guess they’re worrying about us having the money swiped,” said -Dan. “I’ll write to-morrow. There ought to be some letters for us at -Bahogue. Supposing we walk on there to-night after the show? It’s only -about four miles and it’ll be fairly light, I guess. Wait.” He turned -back to the operator. “What’s a good hotel at Bahogue?” he asked. - -“There’s the Seaview and the Bahogue House. They’re both good, I guess.” - -“Seaview sounds good to me,” said Dan. “Is there an office at Bahogue?” - -“Yes.” - -“Good. Give me a blank.” - -“Reserve two rooms for me to-night,” wrote Dan. “Will arrive about -midnight. D. H. F. Speede.” - -“Will you get that off for me, please?” he asked. - -They paid for the message, thanked the operator, said good night, and -went back to the circus, Barry, off his leash for the moment, cutting -all sorts of wild capers. Later the Four paid a visit to the side -show. The performance in the main tent had begun, and they had the -place almost to themselves. The Wild Man of the Tartary Steppes was -seated in a chair on a platform. He was dressed in yellow tights with -a strip of leopard skin about his hips and a string of bones about his -neck. A formidable club rested against his knees. On his head was a wig -of loose and long black hair, and his face was painted with black and -red stripes. He was not attractive, but nevertheless the picture on the -canvas outside was a base libel. He tipped Nelson a portentous wink, -jabbered something at him, and made signs with his hands which Nelson -translated as demands for raw meat. There were a few people wandering -about the tent, and so Nelson and the others waited until they had gone -before approaching the wild man. Then, - -“Well, boys,” said Mr. Cronan, “how are ye the avenin’?” - -“Fine,” answered Nelson. “I’ve brought my friends in to see you. -They’ve never seen a Wild Man before.” - -“Think of thot!” sighed Mr. Cronan. “Sure where was they edicated?” - -“Are you going to eat any raw meat this evening?” asked Tom with a grin. - -“Have you ony wid you?” - -Tom had to acknowledge that he hadn’t. - -“There it is, then,” sighed Mr. Cronan again. “How am I to ate it if I -haven’t got it? ’Tis onreasonable you are, me lad.” - -There were several photographs of the Wild Man lying along the edge of -the platform, and Nelson picked one up and looked at it. - -“Ain’t thot a beautiful thing?” asked Mr. Cronan. “Does it do me -justice, do you think? Put it in your pocket, me boy, an’ show it to -your frinds when you git home. Tell ’em ’tis the picter of a Wild Mon -what chased ye down on Long Island.” - -“I’d like to have it,” laughed Nelson, “but I’d rather pay you for it.” - -“You pays nothin’,” answered Mr. Cronan firmly. “Put it in your pocket, -like I say, wid me compliments. Howld on! Give it me a minute.” The -Wild Man found a stump of a pencil in a hidden pocket, inverted the -photograph on his knee, stuck his tongue in his cheek, and laboriously -wrote. “There, ’tis much more valuable now.” - -Nelson accepted it and thanked him. On the back was written in letters -half an inch high: “Your frand, Thomas Cronan, the wild man.” They were -formally introduced to the Snake Charmer, the Albino Patti, and the -Fortune Teller; also to a sad-looking little man in a suit of misfit -clothes whose duty it was to lecture about the attractions. Presently -they said good-by to Mr. Cronan and went out to the ticket booth. Dan -tried to pay for three reserved seats for his companions, but the -ticket seller refused to accept any money. - -“Go ahead in,” he said smilingly, pushing the tickets and the money -toward them. “This is on the show.” - -So they thanked him, presented their tickets, and were shown to seats, -Dan, however, leaving them to go to the dressing tent and taking Barry -with him. There was not so great a crowd as in the afternoon, but for -all that the big tent was comfortably filled. They had grown to know -a number of the performers by sight now, and the evening performance -proved more interesting for that reason. Dan’s fame had spread, and -when, near the end of the performance, he appeared at the foot of the -ladder, quite a salvo of applause greeted him. - -“Look at Barry!” exclaimed Tom. - -Dan had brought the terrier in with him, and now, when he began to -mount the ladder, Barry started after him. The audience laughed and -clapped. Barry managed three rounds of the ladder by hooking his paws -over them and dragging his body up, but that was as high as he could -get. Three times he made the attempt and three times he tumbled off. -Then he gave it up, barked once, and stood watching his master. As -before, the tent became stilled, Dan’s voice came down eerily from -the platform, the drums rolled, the ringmaster cracked his whip and -shouted his shrill “_In mid-air!_” the dropping pink figure revolved -twice, and the water splashed from the tank. Then, as the applause -broke out, Dan’s wet head appeared, and Barry leaped frantically toward -it. Fighting the terrier off, Dan scrambled from the tank with the -assistance of two of the red-coated men, and, grabbing Barry in his -arms, disappeared toward the dressing tent. - -Afterwards they sought and found Jerry. The mess tent was gone, the -wagon packed, and that department was all ready for the road. - -“Where do you go next, Jerry?” Bob asked. - -“Ridgefield,” answered Jerry. “It’s about forty miles. We travel all -night.” - -“Don’t you ever go by railroad?” asked Nelson. - -“Not when we can help it. It costs more, you see. Some of the -performers take the train, though.” - -“Well, good-by, Jerry. Take care of yourself; and I’ll write to you -soon. Where is it you’re going to work?” - -“Mr. Osgood’s farm,” answered Jerry. “It’s about two miles from -Barrington.” - -“And you’ll be there in October?” - -“Before, I guess,” answered Jerry. “There ain’t much money in this, an’ -since I seen you fellows again----” - -He hesitated. Then, - -“I kind of got more anxious to make that money,” he finished. “I guess -I’ll leave the show about the twentieth.” - -“Well, good luck, Jerry. We’ll see you again, I guess; anyway, I’ll -write to you, because I think I’ll have some news for you.” - -“What--what sort of news?” asked Jerry anxiously. - -“Well, good news; I can’t tell you any more now. Good-by.” - -They all shook hands, and then Jerry, as though loath to part from -them, walked out to the road with them and called a final good-by from -there. - -“Did you get your money from the circus folks?” asked Tom of Dan, as, -with packs once more on their backs, they strode off toward the village. - -“You bet. But, say, fellows, I had an awful time getting away. Murray -made all sorts of offers, and finally I promised him that if I ever -changed my mind I’d let him know right away.” - -“It was a crazy business,” observed Bob. - -“But it found us our dinners,” said Tom philosophically. - -“You can always be sure of Tommy’s point of view,” laughed Nelson. - -It was a clear, calm night, and walking was a pleasure. They were -all well rested, and the four miles intervening between Millford and -Bahogue were soon covered. A few minutes before they reached the hotel -the ocean sprang into view, and they heard the beat of the waves on the -beach. - -“Sounds good to me,” sighed Bob. “Who’s for a bath in the morning?” - -Evidently all were, even Barry, who, excited by the chorus of assent, -barked loudly. They found the Seaview House without difficulty, -assaulted the office gong until a sleepy porter appeared, wrote their -names on the register--Dan signing as “Signor Danello”--and were shown -to their rooms. - -“Gee!” sighed Dan a few minutes later as he pulled the covers down and -rolled under them. “A real bed again! This thing of sleeping nigh to -nature is all very fine, Nel, but--the downy couch for mine every time! -Good night!” - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -TOM SWIMS IN THE OCEAN AND DIPS INTO POETRY - - -They were sitting on the big broad veranda of the hotel reading their -letters. It was eleven o’clock of an ideal September day, and the -guests, of whom there were many left despite the fact that the season -was almost at its close, were strolling or lounging in the sunlight -and making the most of what was likely to be summer’s last appearance. -Beyond the road and the broad crescent of dazzling white beach lay -Great South Bay blue and tranquil, the points of the little waves -touched with gold. Three miles away, a line of gleaming yellow dunes, -Fire Island stretched athwart the horizon. - -The boys had donned clean clothes and, in their Sunday attire, looked -quite respectable. After breakfast they had inquired the way to the -post office and had reached it just in time to get their mail before -it closed. Then, having purchased Sunday papers, they returned to the -hotel veranda and settled down to read. Presently Nelson glanced up -from the letter in his hand. - -“Look here, fellows, this doesn’t sound very promising, does it?” - -“What’s that?” asked Bob, looking up from his own epistle. - -“Why, it’s a letter from dad. You know I wrote him about Jerry, and -here’s what he says. Let me see.... Oh!... ‘Now, about that _protégé_ -you tell of. The matter of seventy-five or a hundred dollars doesn’t -scare me, Nelson, but do you think your plan is feasible? Three hundred -would probably carry the boy through one year at school, supposing -he was able to pass the examinations, but what’s going to happen the -next year? Of course he might get a scholarship to help him along, and -it’s possible he might make some money doing some sort of work in the -village, but he couldn’t count on these things. We might do the boy -more harm than good, it seems to me. Presumably he is fairly content -with his present lot, and it is a question in my mind whether it would -not be advisable to let him go his own gait. If it was certain that he -would not have to give up after a year or two and return to the farm -and the life he is leading now, it would be different. But I don’t -suppose the fathers of your friends would care to undertake to provide -for him for the next four years. Certainly a good deal depends on the -boy. You’ve seen him and I haven’t. Perhaps he’s got it in him to get -the better of difficulties and work out his own salvation after the -first year or two. That would make a difference. Supposing you think -this over and let me hear from you again. Or we might talk it over -after you return. And let me know what the other gentlemen say. Mind, -this isn’t a refusal, and I shall be glad to donate a hundred or two -if I can be sure that it is going to accomplish some good; but I don’t -think it wise to go into anything of this sort without looking over it -pretty thoroughly. There is a great deal of harm done by ill-advised -charity.’” - -“That’s just about what my father says,” said Tom. - -“You’d almost think they’d got together and talked it over,” said Dan -ruefully. “My dad gives me just about the same song and dance. How -about yours, Bob?” - -“He says: ‘Would advise placing the sum, say four hundred dollars, in -the hands of some one, perhaps Mr. Speede, for disbursement on the -lad’s account. Don’t believe it would be wise to pay the money over to -him or his relatives. If you decide to go ahead with the proposition -think I can interest Warren Chase, who is one of the trustees at -Hillton. He might be able to afford assistance to the lad. Am taking it -for granted that the lad is worthy of the assistance you propose; am -willing to trust your judgment in this. One hundred is all I can afford -at present, though it is possible that I might be able to help put -Hinkley through a second year when the time came. Let me know when you -want the money and I will forward check.’” - -“Now, I call that businesslike,” said Dan approvingly. “My dad seems -to think it’s all a bally joke; wants to know if Jerry had _his_ money -stolen too!” - -“Well, let’s talk it over,” Nelson proposed. “Now, supposing we get -enough money to pay one year’s expenses at Hillton, can Jerry pass -the exams? He’s had no languages at all except one year’s Latin in a -village school.” - -“He ought to go to school this winter,” said Bob, “and take Math and -Latin--hard.” - -“Of course he ought! And he ought to have some coaching next summer. -How’s he going to do it?” - -“We need more money,” said Tom. - -“Look here,” said Dan. “Talk sense. What’s to keep Jerry from going to -school this winter? If we provide the money for the first year at that -bum school of yours, why can’t he spend this winter and next summer -studying?” - -“That’s so,” said Nelson. “But how about the second year, and the third -and the fourth?” - -“What’s the use of troubling about that now?” asked Dan cheerfully. -“Let’s get him started and I’ll bet you anything he’ll pretty nearly -look after himself. As for next summer, it wouldn’t cost much to find a -tutor for him. Why, we could see to that ourselves. I know two or three -fellows in New York who would be mighty glad to coach him and do it -cheap.” - -“That’s the stuff!” cried Tom. - -“What do you think, Bob?” Nelson asked. - -“I think what Dan says is sense. Education never hurt any chap, and -even if Jerry didn’t get more than two years at Hillton--and I guess we -could see that he got that much--it would make a difference to him all -his life. But I think, as Dan does, that if we give Jerry a start he’ll -be able to find his own way after the first year. Could he get anything -to do at Hillton that would bring him in some money?” - -“Yes,” answered Nelson, “he could. There are lots of fellows there now -who are almost putting themselves through. Look at Ted Rollins! Ted -came there three years ago with three dollars in his pocket and a hand -satchel. And he’s going to graduate next spring. I know for a fact that -his folks have never sent him a penny; they can’t; they’re poor as -church mice.” - -“Well, as far as I can see,” answered Bob, “our dads are ready to -give the money as soon as we can convince them that we are in earnest -and that Jerry deserves it. And I vote that we go ahead. You ask your -father, Dan, if he’s willing to take the money and pay it out for Jerry -as it’s required. We’ll all write home this evening and tell just how -the matter stands and ask to have the money sent to Mr. Speede about -the fifteenth of this month. Have you got Jerry’s address, Nel?” - -“Yes; and I think the best thing to do, after we’re certain that -everything’s all right, is to see him on the way back and tell him all -about it, just what we propose to do, and all. He said he’d probably be -there by the fifteenth.” - -“That’s right,” said Dan. - -“But, look here,” exclaimed Tom, “if we don’t need the money until next -fall, what’s the good of having it sent to your father now?” - -“Because,” Bob answered, “four hundred dollars put in the savings bank -or invested at four per cent means sixteen dollars a year from now. And -that will be enough to pay his railway fare to Hillton and back again.” - -“That’s so,” acknowledged Tom. “Bob, you’re a regular Rothschild.” - -“He’s a regular Yankee!” said Dan. - -“Besides,” continued Bob, unheeding of compliments, “if Dan’s father -has the money we’ll know where it is, and so will Jerry. There’s -nothing like being certain, you know. It beats promises.” - -“Right again, O Solomon!” said Dan. “I’ll ask dad about it. I guess he -will be glad to look after the Jeremiah Hinkley Fund and see that it is -well and safely invested. That’s settled, then. We’ll each of us write -to-night and get the thing all finished up ship-shape, eh? Now who’s -going for a swim?” - -There was no dissentient voice, even Barry proclaiming loudly and -enthusiastically in favor of the suggestion. And a quarter of an hour -later they met in front of the bath houses ready for the plunge. They -found the water surprisingly warm. Barry splashed and leaped, biting -at the tiny breakers and then running away from them as though for his -very life. For a long while there was scarcely a breaker fortunate -enough to reach the beach without first having a hole bitten in it! -After some twenty minutes of diving and swimming the Four returned to -the warm sand and stretched themselves out. By this time the beach had -become well peopled, and from the surf came the shrieks and laughter of -the women and children. Some of the larger boys had started a game of -scrub baseball and were having an exciting and hilarious time. The Four -sat up and looked on for a while. Then, after the ball had taken Dan in -various parts of his anatomy three times, he arose disgustedly. - -“Those fellows think I’m a backstop,” he said. “Maybe I am, but I don’t -work for nothing. Come on, and let’s go in again.” - -So back to the water they went and mingled with the throng of bathers. -A group of men and older boys were arranging a swimming race out to a -sloop anchored about a quarter of a mile offshore and back. One of the -number, a muscular-looking fellow of about twenty-two with a Mercury’s -foot on the breast of his jersey, was evidently the best performer, for -the others were calling on him for handicaps. - -“You?” he asked of an inquiring youth. “Oh, I’ll give you halfway to -the yacht.” - -“I don’t want that much,” objected the other. - -“Oh, very well, don’t take it,” laughed the crack. “It isn’t -compulsory, you know.” - -“Is this an open race?” asked Dan smilingly. - -The crack turned. - -“Surely,” he answered heartily. “Come on. Want a handicap?” - -“Want to give me one?” - -The other looked him over carefully and pursed his lips in a doubtful -smile. - -“You look sort o’ good, my friend. What’s your record for the quarter?” - -“I don’t know. I haven’t been timed for two or three years. Give me a -couple of hundred yards.” - -“All right, but I don’t like your looks.” - -“How about me?” asked Tom, joining them. He looked like a good-natured, -pink-and-white barrel, and the crack smiled as he looked him over. - -“Well, how much do you want?” he asked. - -“Three hundred yards,” was the prompt reply. - -“I’ll give it to you!” - -“All right, put my name down,” said Tom. - -The youth with the Mercury’s foot gravely wrote in the water with his -finger, and the onlookers laughed. Then the contestants, of whom there -were about a dozen, set off to their places. There was a good deal of -good-natured argument as to the distances taken up by those receiving -handicaps, but at last all were in position. Some one shouted “_Go!_” -at the top of his lungs, and the race began. They were to swim to the -sloop, pass around it, and return to the beach. Dan, who had no hope -of winning, since he conceived the Mercury’s foot chap to be unusually -good at the work, took things leisurely enough. But Tom, quite unawed -by the crack, set off as though he meant to win the race. As a result -he was the first to reach the sloop, having passed three competitors on -the way out to it, and turned toward home still swimming strongly. - -The sea was quite smooth, and what tide there was was setting toward -shore. Some eighty or a hundred yards back from the sloop he passed -the crack swimming almost under water with long deliberate strokes of -his powerful arms. He smiled across at Tom in a brief moment when his -head was out of water, and that smile, at once amused and confident, -gave Tom a foretaste of defeat. Still, he was, perhaps, two hundred -yards ahead of the other, and if he could only keep his present speed -up for the rest of the distance he thought he might win. Tom wasn’t -a sprinter, but in a half mile or even a quarter he was no mean -antagonist. In spite of his rotundity of build he was strong of muscle -and, moreover, had learned the science of making every ounce of effort -tell. Presently Dan passed, fighting hard with another contestant. -Then, back of them, came the tag end of the procession. But Tom was -paying strict attention to business now and had no time for watching -others. Only once, while still halfway between sloop and finish, did -he let up for a moment and strive to see his principal rival, and then -he saw enough to set him frantically at work again. For the crack had -rounded the sloop and was hot on Tom’s trail and scarcely a hundred -yards in the rear. Tom struck out again with long, even strokes, -swimming hand over hand and pushing the water back from him with every -bit of strength in his body. - -Among the breakers and just beyond them the spectators were watching -eagerly. Some few swam out to speed the winner over the line. Two men -and a young lady in a rowboat, which had mysteriously appeared on the -scene, shouted encouragingly to Tom. - -“Go it, kid!” cried one of the men. “You can beat him! You’re holding -him!” - -“Kid, eh?” thought Tom disgustedly. “I’ll show them!” - -And now, with a little more than a hundred yards to go, Tom eased his -stroke a bit, for his muscles were aching terribly and his breath -threatened every instant to fail him and leave him rolling helplessly -about out there like a plump porpoise. And behind him, perhaps forty -or fifty yards back, the crack was coming along hard and fast, still -swimming with practically the same stroke he had started with. - -Well, it was no disgrace to be beaten by a chap six or seven years your -senior, even if you had been given three hundred yards out of nine -hundred, thought Tom, in an effort to console himself. But the argument -didn’t satisfy him, and he took a deep breath of the good salt air and -forgot for a moment that his arms and legs felt as though they belonged -to some one else. Then the breakers were forming about him in little -hillocks of green water, the encouraging cries of the watchers reached -him when his head came dripping above the surface, and--and, almost -upon him, sounded the quick and regular splash of the pursuer! Tom -closed his eyes tight and tried to forget everything save the man in -the blue bathing suit, who, just where the breakers paused before the -curve, stood to indicate the finish line. A long swell shot him forward -for an instant. Then the returning undertow made it hard fighting. - -And now he was in a wide lane formed by the splashing audience and -there was but another dozen yards to go. For a moment he began to hope. -But for a moment only. The steady strokes of his opponent were loud -in his ears now, and as he looked for an instant a brown hand reached -forward almost beside him and disappeared, burying itself in the -green, froth-streaked water. It was all up! thought Tom. He hated to -be beaten, did Tom, and for an instant he felt rather bad. And in that -instant two things happened: the crack swimmer drew abreast of him and -Tom had an idea. He suddenly remembered that he had always been able -to swim faster under water for a short distance than on top, and like -a flash he acted on that knowledge. Down went his head and shoulders, -his heels kicked in air for a moment like a steamer’s propeller out of -water, and then he vanished from the gaze of the laughing, shouting -watchers. - -One, two, three, four, five strokes he took down there with the pale -green, sunlit waters about him; then up he came, thrashing desperately. -His foot struck the knee of his opponent, for a moment he had a glimpse -of a drawn, set face seen across the surface of the little wavelets, -and then it was all over, and he was struggling to his feet and gasping -painfully for breath. - -“Who won?” was the cry. - -The man in the blue bathing suit shook his head ruefully. - -“No one,” he answered. “It was the deadest kind of a dead heat. They -were side by side. We’ll have to divide first money, I guess,” he -added, with a laugh. - -The youth with the Mercury’s foot on his jersey came up to Tom with -outstretched hand. - -“We finished together,” he said smilingly. “But don’t you ever talk to -me again about a three-hundred-yards handicap! That was the hardest -race ever I was in. My boy, you can certainly swim, and if you’ll keep -at it and train off some of that flesh of yours, you’ll have us all -beaten by the time you get to college. What’s your name?” - -Tom struggled for breath. His heart was beating like a sledge hammer -and his lungs were doing what he called afterwards “a double shuffle.” - -“Tu-tu-tu-tu--” he began. But for the life of him he couldn’t get any -farther. The audience tried hard not to laugh, and the crack smiled -in spite of himself. He might never have received an answer to his -question if Nelson hadn’t come to the rescue. - -“His name’s Ferris, Tom Ferris,” said Nelson. “He’s a pretty good -swimmer for a fatty, isn’t he?” - -That insult summoned Tom’s lost breath. - -“Hope you ch-ch-ch-choke!” he stammered. - -“Well, you’re all right, my boy,” said the crack admiringly. “We’ll -have a talk after dinner, if you like.” - -Nodding, he moved off to the beach and disappeared into his bath house. -Nelson took Tom by the arm and led him in the same direction. Bob and -Dan, the latter having just finished fifth in the race, joined them. - -“You were a cheeky beggar, Tommy,” said Bob, “to try and beat that -fellow!” - -“Why?” gasped Tom, stretching his arms in the hope that they would stop -paining. - -“Why, because he’s Woodbury, of”--here Bob mentioned a well-known New -York athletic club--“and he holds the quarter-mile and half-mile -amateur records, my boy.” - -“Well, I could beat him next time,” said Tom stoutly. - -“Yes, with three hundred yards,” said Dan derisively. - -“Huh! You had two hundred yourself,” said Tom scathingly, “and you came -near not finishing at all!” - -“You kicked up such a sea I couldn’t get my bearings,” answered Dan -gravely. “Swam straight out to sea for half a mile or so before I -discovered my mistake.” - -“If you could swim as well as you can lie--” began Tom. - -“Tommy! Tommy!” warned Bob. - -“Well, wha-wha-what’s he tu-tu-tu-talk that way for?” asked Tom -aggrievedly. “I can swim better than he can, anyway. I’d be ashamed if -I couldn’t!” - -Dan accepted the gibe in smiling silence, and the Four retired to -their two bath houses with chattering teeth. For a while nothing was -to be heard but hoarse breathing and the tread of scurrying feet as -bath towels were fiercely applied. Then, warmth returning to the -chilled bodies, the Four began to whistle and sing at the top of their -lungs. Dan went through everything he knew and then began on his own -compositions: - - “Tom, Tom, the Piper’s son, - Swam a half a mile, by gum!” - -It was necessary to sing it very loudly and several times over in order -that the subject of the song should hear it. When satisfied by the -howls of derision which came from next door that Tom and Bob had heard, -he gave his attention to the latter: - - “Mr. Bob, of Portland, Maine, - Wouldn’t he give you a pain?” - -More howls, dismal and prolonged, from the opposition. Then Tom’s -voice, eager, triumphant: - - “Du-du-du-Dan, Dan, su-silly old Dan! - Eats blue paint out of a can!” - -This reference to an episode of the preceding summer when Dan, playing -sign painter, had got himself very thoroughly mixed up with a half -gallon of bright blue paint, brought laughter from all. - -“Let’s have a rhyme on Nelson,” suggested Bob. - -“All right; you do it,” said Dan. - -“Oh, I’m no poet. And I haven’t got my rhyming dictionary with me.” - -“Oh, never mind the rhymes,” said Nelson. “Don’t let those bother you; -Dan doesn’t.” - -“My rhymes are always faultless,” answered the other. - -“Oh, yes; like ‘son’ and ‘gum’!” - -“Those rhyme!” - -“Get out!” - -“Of course they do! Don’t they, Bob?” - -“They may to you.” - - “Not every one can be a poet, - Any more than a sheep can be a go-at,” - -quoted Nelson. - -“I’ve gu-gu-gu-gu-got it!” stammered Tom. - -“You have; bad,” was Dan’s cruel reply. - -“Listen!” cried Tom, unheeding. - - “There was a young fellow named Nelson--” - -“Bet you can’t find a rhyme for it,” jeered Nelson. - -“Shut up and let me tell it! - - “There was a young fellow named Nelson, - Who sometimes got foolish spells on--” - -“O-oh!” groaned the rest. - - “‘--It’s quite plain to see,’ - Said his friends, ‘you would be - A clown if you only had bells on!’” - -“Tommy, you’re a regular Alfred Austin!” cried Dan. The rest cheered -and applauded noisily, and Tom was so pleased with his effort that -he repeated it at intervals for the next few days on the slightest -provocation. - -After dinner they sat for a time on the broad front veranda with Mr. -Woodbury, who was quite taken with Tom, and afterwards took boat over -to Fire Island on an exploring expedition. They found lots to interest -them on that barren expanse of sand dune and beach, not the least of -which was the life-saving station which they visited. - -It was a square two-story building standing just above high water on -the seaward side of the island. A neat white-washed fence inclosed it, -and it was fronted by a plot of grass of which the members of the crew -were very proud. There were beds of flowers, too, geraniums mostly, -bordered with beach stones. The lifeboat and apparatus were kept in a -one-story addition to the dwelling house. The boys asked permission -to look about and were cordially welcomed. They were shown over the -place from top to bottom, inside and out. They saw the big, square -dormitory with its white iron beds, each flanked by a chest or trunk -containing the member’s clothes, the pleasant living room, the kitchen, -and the well-stocked storeroom. Their guide, a big blond-haired Swede, -explained that in the winter time communication with the mainland was -sometimes cut off for a week or more at a time, and therefore it was -necessary to keep a good supply of food on hand. - -In the living room were several charts, and Tom in examining one -of them made the discovery that there were twenty-nine life-saving -stations along the south shore of Long Island, an interesting fact -which he brought to the attention of the others. Then they all had -to count, and each one got a different result, Dan making it as high -as thirty-four. After that they visited the boathouse and saw the big -lifeboat, the mortar used for shooting the lifeline out to a wreck, the -breeches buoy--which Tom wanted very much to get into--and many other -interesting objects. At last, thanking their host, they crossed the -island to the landing and returned to the hotel just in time for supper. - -After that meal was over--and it took some time to satisfy their -appetites, which had been sharpened by the salt breezes--they devoted -the evening to letter writing. Even Tom was able to think of something -to say without having to call for suggestions from his friends. Before -retiring they took up the matter of their route for the next two days. - -“I think,” said Tom, “it would be mighty jolly to go over to Fire -Island and walk along to the eastern end of it. We could see the -life-saving stations and--and there might be a wreck!” - -“Tommy, you’re a regular ghoul!” said Bob. - -“What’s that?” asked Tom. - -“Don’t you know what a ghoul is, you ignoramus?” - -“A football goal, do you mean?” asked Tom innocently. - -When the laughter had died away, they decided to keep along the south -shore until they reached Peconic Bay. Then they would cross the -island to the north side and return along the edge of the Sound to -Barrington, where they hoped to find Jerry. - -During the last five minutes of the conference Tom had been nodding -shamelessly. They woke him up, disposed of Barry for the night, and -went to bed. - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -TELLS HOW THEY MEET THE MANNIG BASEBALL CLUB AND HOW NELSON AND BOB GET -ENGAGEMENTS - - -They made an early start the next morning. There was a delicious fresh -breeze blowing from the bay, they were well rested, and life was well -worth living. For an hour they walked briskly and put several miles -of hard, smooth road behind them. Then the sun began to make itself -felt, and their pace slackened. Whenever they caught a glimpse of Fire -Island, Tom looked toward it longingly. - -“I’m going over there some time and stay until there’s a storm and a -wreck. Wouldn’t you love to see them rescue folks?” - -Bob thought that maybe he would; at any rate, he was quite certain he -would much rather look on than take part. - -“I wouldn’t,” answered Tom promptly and with conviction. “I’d love to -be a life saver! Maybe, when I get through college, I will be. Wouldn’t -it be exciting, Bob?” - -“Very,” was the unenthusiastic response. “Think of tumbling out of -bed at three o’clock of a winter morning, with the thermometer doing -stunts around zero, and taking a nice brisk row for a half a mile or so -through waves as high as that house over there! Yes, indeed, Tommy, it -would be simply sweet!” - -Tommy’s further remarks on the subject were interrupted by sounds on -the road behind them. They turned and moved aside in time to escape -being run down by a coach drawn by two horses and filled with a merry -crowd of men and boys, some in gray baseball uniforms and others in -ordinary attire. As the coach swept past, the Four were treated to a -cheer, a wonderful medley which sounded about as intelligible as a -Choctaw war cry. Behind the first coach was a second similarly filled, -and this one slowed down as it reached them. - -“Want a ride?” sung out a fellow in baseball attire who occupied the -seat with the driver. The Four looked at each other inquiringly. - -“We might ride for a little ways,” suggested Tom sheepishly. - -The fellow in front accepted their hesitation as assent. - -“Pile in there behind,” he said. “You’ll find room somewhere!” - -“Sure!” called a voice from the body of the coach, which was one of -those long vehicles with seats running lengthwise on either side, known -in some localities as a “barge.” “Sure! Lots of room. Come on!” - -So they went. A boy hanging on to the steps behind dropped out of the -way, and they climbed in. The occupants, a merry, good-natured throng, -shoved and pushed until there was room for the newcomers, and the coach -started up again. Many curious looks were cast at the boys’ packs, and -finally, - -“Going over to the game?” asked Dan’s nearest neighbor. - -“What game is that?” asked Dan politely. - -“Oh, I thought perhaps you were going,” was the reply. “It’s the game -between Laurelville and Mannig; baseball, you know. We play ’em every -year for a purse.” - -“Oh,” said Dan, in turn. “Where’s it to be?” - -“Laurelville this year. We’re the Mannig team--and rooters,” he added -with a laugh. “The fellow that called out to you is Burns, our captain -and third baseman. It’s going to be a great game. Everybody turns out, -you know.” - -“I see. Are you going to win?” - -“Not likely, I guess,” was the answer. But a howl of protest arose. - -“Sure, we are!” - -“Beat ’em silly!” - -“We won’t do a thing to ’em!” - -Dan’s informant grinned and dropped his voice. - -“They’ll lick us for keeps, I guess,” he said cheerfully. “Our -pitcher’s sick and can’t play. We tried to get Monroe, of Brooklyn; -ever hear of him? Well, he’s a dandy, but he wanted more than we could -pay. We offered him thirty-five too!” - -“But--do the other fellows let you get players from outside?” asked Dan. - -“Oh, yes, we get ’em wherever we can find ’em. So does Laurelville. -Their pitcher is Somes, of Rockaway, and he’s a dandy. We won’t be able -to hit him at all. And they’ve got a catcher, too, that’s just about -all right!” - -“Where is Laurelville?” asked Bob. - -“About four miles farther. You fellows had better come along and see -the game.” - -“Maybe we will,” answered Bob. “What do you say, Nelson?” - -“I’m willing,” was the answer. “Can we get something to eat there?” - -“Yes, indeed; there’s a fine hotel at Laurelville. You’d better come -along and root for us.” - -“All right,” laughed Nelson. “We’ve got good loud voices.” - -“Yes,” agreed Dan; “this fellow here got first prize once for making a -noise; didn’t you, Tommy?” - -“Shut up,” answered Tom, with a grin. - -A fellow in baseball togs who appeared to be about twenty-five or -six -years of age, and who was sitting on the other side of the coach, -leaned forward and asked smilingly: - -“I suppose you fellows don’t play?” - -“Not much,” answered Bob carelessly. - -Perhaps it was Tom’s look of surprise or the twinkle in Dan’s eye which -made the other doubt the truth of Bob’s assertion. - -“Because, you know,” he continued, “we need a pitcher like anything, -and we could use a good batsman somewhere. And there’d be a little -money in it too.” - -Tom nudged Bob and looked excitedly at Nelson. - -“Why don’t you, Nel?” he exclaimed. - -“You dry up, Tommy,” answered Nelson. - -“Look here,” said the player, leaving his seat and swaying unsteadily -in front of the Four, “if any of you fellows can pitch we’ll make it -worth your while!” - -“Thanks,” answered Nelson; “but you mustn’t mind Tommy; he’s not -altogether sane; has fits once in a while.” - -“But, look here, I’m in earnest!” continued the other. The other -members of the Mannig delegation were leaning forward and listening -interestedly. - -“Well, what Tommy means is that I have pitched,” answered Nelson, a -trifle embarrassed, “but I wouldn’t do for you chaps. I’m not fancy -enough.” - -“Tell you what we’ll do,” said the other excitedly. “You come with us -and show us what you can do before dinner. And if we like the looks of -it, we’ll give you twenty dollars to pitch the game for us. And if -any of the rest of you can hit well, we’ll find a place for you in the -outfield and pay you ten dollars. That’s a fair offer, isn’t it?” - -“Fair enough,” answered Nelson laughingly. “But we couldn’t take your -money, you see, because we’re going to college next year, and if we did -we wouldn’t be able to play there.” - -“Oh, pshaw, we don’t know your names or anything about you,” was the -reply. “We’ll all forget it to-morrow. You needn’t be afraid of that.” - -“Thanks,” answered Nelson dryly, “but I’d rather not.” - -Tom looked greatly disappointed. - -“Show them what you can do, Nel,” advised Bob. “It will be rather good -fun. I’d like to play myself,” he added, turning to the player. “I’m -not in practice, I guess; haven’t played since last month, and then not -much; but I can hit sometimes.” - -“Prove it and I’ll pay you ten dollars for the game!” said the other -quickly. “I’m manager and I can do what I say; and I will do it too.” - -“Oh, no, you won’t!” laughed Bob good-naturedly. “If you want me to -help you out, I’ll do it, but I won’t take any money for it. That’s -understood. How about you, Nel? Want to try pitching? You can do it, -I’ll bet.” - -“I’ll play if you will,” answered Nelson. - -“Where do Tommy and I come in?” asked Dan. He turned to the Mannig -manager. “Want anyone to peddle popcorn or sell lemonade?” he inquired -gravely. - -“Don’t you play?” asked the manager, casting an admiring glance over -Dan’s figure. - -“Me? Why, I was with the Clevelands for three years,” answered Dan. -“But I’ve been ill, and the doctor thinks I’d better stay out of the -game for a while.” - -“I see,” answered the other with a laugh. Then he squeezed himself -between Bob and Nelson, and asked questions and answered them. - -It seemed that the annual game between Laurelville and Mannig had -become an event of some importance in that part of the island. They had -played each other for six years, during which time each team had won -three games. This year’s contest was, therefore, in a way decisive. -Each year the merchants and citizens of the rival towns donated a purse -of five hundred dollars, four hundred of which went to the victors and -one hundred to the vanquished. Each team secured players wherever they -could find them, paying such prices for their services as they could -afford. And as the residents of the two towns were extremely generous -in the matter of donations, some of the prices paid to crack players -were pretty high. The umpire, explained the manager--who told them his -name was Fultz--was a professional from New York. Their team, Fultz -went on to explain, had had rather hard luck this season; two of their -best men had deserted them, and their pitcher was ill in bed. As a -result they weren’t very hopeful of victory. - -“Unless,” he added, observing Nelson anxiously, “you can help us out a -good bit.” - -But Nelson spoke very modestly of his prowess, and the manager’s hopes -dwindled. Presently the Mannig captain, Burns, saw that something was -up and came back to them. Introductions were made, and Burns declared -himself highly pleased at the prospect of being assisted by Nelson and -Bob. But, nevertheless, he didn’t look especially enthusiastic. Perhaps -the two, in their travel-stained pedestrian costumes, didn’t look very -much like adept ball players. - -Laurelville, which they reached at about half-past ten, proved to be -quite a fair-sized town; and it was very evident that it was in holiday -garb and holiday humor. The windows of the stores were liberally -decorated with green and white, and flags and streamers of the same -colors were flaunted from the fronts of the buildings. When the coaches -reached the hotel the porch of that hostelry was already pretty well -crowded with guests. Naturally, the arrival of the Mannig contingent -occasioned not a little interest. The adjacent sidewalk was crowded -with small boys, and their remarks as the rival players descended from -the coaches were more graphic than complimentary. Tom descended to a -veritable fusillade of comment. - -“Say, look at the fat boy!” - -“Bet yer he can run fine!” - -“Get out! He ain’t no player; he’s the backstop, he is!” - -Tom showed symptoms of annoyance, and to prevent hostilities Dan -lugged him quickly up the steps of the hotel. After they had all -registered, and the Four had been impressively introduced to almost -every Mannigite, they adjourned to a vacant lot back of the house and -held an hour’s practice, observed and criticised by most of the younger -population of Laurelville. Nelson showed what he could do at twirling, -and, although at first he was rather wild and uncertain, after a few -minutes he got settled down, and Fultz and Burns looked almost cheerful. - -Bob got into the batting work and had no trouble in putting the ball -wherever he wanted to. But, of course, the delivery was easy enough to -hit, and his performance then was no criterion of what would happen in -the game. At twelve they went back to the house and were instructed to -rest until dinner time. Many of the players found seats on the porch, -where they indulged in a battle of repartee with the local wits lined -up along the curbstone. Others sought the billiard room and spent -most of that hour of rest walking about the tables. Tom and Dan took -a walk through the village, accompanied by Barry. The latter seemed -to understand that for the present he owed allegiance to Mannig, and, -coming across a yellow dog decorated with a bunch of green and white -ribbon, proceeded to inflict summary punishment and establish the -superiority of the visitors. By the time Dan had dragged him away from -his prey the green and white ribbon wasn’t worth talking about. Barry -stood the subsequent cuffing with equanimity, and trotted on again -behind his master with a knowing leer in his eye and a section of -tattered ribbon hanging rakishly and defiantly from the corner of his -mouth. - -The main street of the town was becoming quite populous with vehicles, -and the holiday atmosphere increased every moment. The game was the -one important and all-absorbing topic of conversation. When the two -stopped to buy some sweet chocolate at a corner fruit stand, the -Italian proprietor asked eagerly who they thought would win, and -when, later on, returning to the hotel, they entered a drug store for -egg phosphates, the clerk who served them was full of questions and -information. - -“They tell me,” he said, “that Mannig’s got a fellow to pitch for them -who was with the Hoboken team last year, a regular peach. Did you hear -anything about it?” - -Dan looked wise as he sipped his phosphate. - -“Something,” he answered. “I was talking with Burns, the Mannig -captain, awhile ago. But I understood that the pitcher is a fellow -named Tilford who pitched for Chicora.” - -“Where’s that?” asked the clerk. - -“New Hampshire.” - -“Good team?” - -“Fine! Beat everything in sight, they tell me. And this pitcher is a -corker. Your men here won’t be able to touch him; he’s got a slow drop -that’ll make them look silly!” - -“Are you a Mannig fellow?” asked the clerk suspiciously. - -“No, we’re strangers here; just happened along this morning. Would you -mind putting a bit more milk in this? It’s a little too sweet.” - -The clerk obeyed, thereby practically doubling Dan’s drink. Tom watched -enviously, and looked doubtfully at his own glass, which was about -empty, in the hope that the clerk would offer to perform a like service -for him. But the clerk was busy talking again, and paid no attention. - -“Well, we think we’ve got a pretty good pitcher ourselves,” he said -smugly. “Ever hear of ‘Slim’ Somes, of Rockaway?” - -Dan said he had, neglecting to add that the only occasion on which he -had heard of Mr. Somes was that morning in the coach. The clerk nodded -with satisfaction. - -“Well, just you keep your eyes on him,” he advised. “He’s one of the -best there is, he is. And if you want to bet anything on the game, I -know where you’ll find some one to oblige you.” - -“Thanks,” answered Dan carelessly. “I make it a rule never to bet. I’m -so lucky that it seems too bad to take the other chap’s money every -time; I get ashamed of myself. Well, good luck.” - -They went out and made their way along the crowded sidewalk to the -hotel, the only incident of moment occurring when Barry was suddenly -missed, and was discovered a minute later in a baker’s shop, where he -had “treed” a big Maltese cat on top of a showcase. The woman in charge -was highly indignant, and threatened Dan with the law until he squared -himself by purchasing three jelly tarts for a nickel, and admiring the -cat. - -Dinner was a confused and hurried meal, for there were at least three -applicants for every place at the four long tables, and to eat calmly -with a dozen persons crowding about and waiting for your chair was -simply out of the question. - -The game was to begin at half-past two, and at two the coaches came -to the door again, and the Mannig party tumbled into them, and were -driven away to a chorus of hoots and jeers from the audience outside -the hotel. The ball ground was on the outskirts of the town, a very -creditable field with a grand stand capable of seating several hundred -persons. The Mannig team took the field for practice. Nelson and Bob -had been presented with uniforms of gray flannel bearing big blue -Ms on the breasts of the shirts, uniforms secured from a couple of -substitutes only after persuasion almost amounting to main force. Bob -was put at right field. It had been some time since he had played in -the outfield, for his position was behind the bat, but after a few -flies had come his way he gained the old knack of judging. For several -years he had played on his high-school team, and last spring he had -been elected captain. Besides this he had played with and captained -the Camp Chicora team for the past two summers. Dan, too, was by this -time a fairly experienced player. At school he was only the substitute -pitcher, but in spite of that he was pretty clever. At Chicora he had -done excellent service the past summer in the box, and he and Bob had -comprised a very formidable battery. During practice he warmed up by -pitching to the Mannig catcher, a long, lanky youth, named Conly, and -it soon became evident that they were going to work together very well. - -By half-past two the grand stand was comfortably filled and the -ground around the diamond was well sprinkled with spectators. Quite -a contingent had followed the blue players from Mannig, and their -ear-splitting yell was heard continuously. At a few minutes before -the half-hour Mannig gave up the field to Laurelville, and the -green-and-white-stockinged players trotted out for practice. - -When it was twenty minutes of three the Mannig manager returned to -the bench where his players were seated and announced that the umpire -hadn’t turned up, and that it had been decided to wait until the next -train came in. - -“When does it get here?” asked Burns. - -“Two-fifty-six,” was the answer. - -“Gee! That’ll make it mighty late!” - -“Yes, but that’s the only thing to do, I guess.” - -So they waited. Presently the Laurelville team came off, and the -audience on the stand began to inquire, in the polite manner common to -baseball audiences, why the game didn’t start. At ten minutes after -three the tardy official, a little, round red-cheeked man, put in his -appearance, and at twenty minutes after three called “Play!” - - - - -CHAPTER XVI - -WHEREIN NELSON AND BOB PLAY BALL AND LAURELVILLE MAKES A PROTEST - - -That was a strange and wonderful game! - -Neither Nelson nor Bob--nor for that matter Tom nor Dan, who merely -looked on--ever quite forgot it. The first inning was not over before -it became evident that in the annual contests between Mannig and -Laurelville “everything went.” It was “anything to win,” and “dirty -playing” was not only looked for but applauded vigorously. The rivalry -was intense, and the feeling between the opposing teams was not of the -best. - -That first inning ended without a score. Mannig had won the toss -and had gone into the field. Nelson had disposed of the first three -Laurelville batsmen in short order, and his reputation, which had -grown at leaps and bounds during the forenoon, went up still farther. -He was variously said to be a “second-string” pitcher from the New -York American team, an A1 twirler from the Hobokens, borrowed for the -occasion, and a youthful wonder from some small team in New Hampshire. -Nelson, however, was quite unaware of the interest and curiosity which -he was arousing. - -But if Laurelville had failed to get to first in that inning, Mannig -could boast of no better success. Her first three men went out quickly, -Burns flying to shortstop, Morris striking out, and Kleinschmidt being -easily beaten to first by the ball. There was all sorts of noise from -the audience, and everybody, from the small boys along the base lines -to the players themselves, showed intense excitement. - -Laurelville had no better luck during her second inning, Nelson -disposing of three men with exactly seventeen deliveries. - -Harrison, the Mannig second baseman, a fellow of twenty-six or -seven -years and a powerful batter, opened up for his side in the last of the -second. He didn’t find Mr. “Slim” Somes very difficult, it seemed, for -he caught the first ball delivered on the end of his bat and sent it -flying over first baseman’s head for a hit. The next batsman sent him -on to second and was caught himself at first. Then came Fultz, the -manager, who played in center field. He had two strikes called on him -before he offered. Then he found something to his liking and knocked -a long fly into left field. Left fielder failed to get under it, and -Harrison romped home. Fultz was safe on first. - -The Laurelville supporters jeered and shouted in an effort to drown -the wild acclaim of the Mannigites, but to little purpose. If Mannig’s -cheer wasn’t musical, it was at least powerful, and it made the welkin -ring for a while. By the time things had quieted down somewhat, Bob -was at the plate. Fultz evidently expected a sacrifice which would -put him on second, but Bob wasn’t used to playing sacrifices with one -man out. The result was that on the first delivery Fultz streaked for -second. The Laurelville catcher shot the ball down to shortstop, and -Fultz walked off the diamond to the hoots and catcalls of the enemy. -The incident worried Bob somewhat, and in a moment he had struck out. -Fultz was feeling a trifle sore and let Bob know it as they trotted out -to the field together. But Bob expressed such deep contrition that the -manager regained his temper and laughed it off. - -The first of the third brought the Laurelville tail-enders to the bat, -but the tail-enders proved more formidable that inning than the head -of the batting list had theretofore. The second man up--the first had -been easily disposed of--found Nelson for a two-bagger. The next man, -the redoubtable Somes, got Nelson so rattled by his remarks and monkey -tricks that Nelson gave him, very unwillingly, you may be certain, his -base on balls. Then came a wild throw to third by Conly, who hoped to -catch the runner napping, and Laurelville scored her first run. - -If there had been noise before, there was pandemonium now! - -Kleinschmidt, the Blue’s left fielder, who had very neatly backed up -third baseman and so prevented a second tally, tossed the ball back to -Nelson in disgust. Burns, from third, was venting his anger on everyone -within sound of his voice, and Nelson didn’t escape. - -“No more gifts, Tilford!” he cried. “If you can’t put them over, hit -him with it! Only don’t let him walk!” - -Nelson turned back to the next batsman, suddenly experiencing a deep -dislike for the whole business. They were all a crowd of muckers, he -told himself, and he wished he hadn’t agreed to pitch for them. But -now that he was in it he had to keep it up. So he tried to steady down -and dispose of the batter. But Conly was exasperated over his wild -throw and let the first delivery pass him, and the man on second got to -third. A hit would mean a second tally. Nelson tried an outcurve, but -the batsman only smiled. Then Nelson gave him a slow, straight ball, -and the batter was caught for a strike. The score was two and one. Then -came a third ball, and Nelson wondered what Burns would say or do if -the batsman walked to first. But a drop improved the situation, even -though Nelson was still, to use baseball parlance, “in a hole.” There -was only one thing to do, and that was to put the ball over the plate -and trust to the fielders. So he did it. But he didn’t have to trust -to the fielders. The man at bat found the delivery, and sent it hard -and straight toward Nelson. It was coming so swiftly that he might have -been excused for letting it pass. But he reached up and brought it -down, even though the shock staggered him for an instant, and then sped -it to third. The inning was over, with the score one to one. - -Mannig trotted in, and Conly picked out his bat. He found what he -wanted in Mr. Somes’s second delivery, and hit safe for one base. -Nelson followed with an attempted sacrifice that worked so well that -he not only advanced Conly, but reached first safely himself by a -hairbreadth. That decision of the umpire’s brought out wild protest -from the Laurelville supporters, and an energetic “kick” from the -Green-and-White’s captain. But the umpire wasn’t the sort to let a -player disturb him for very long, and soon the captain had retired to -his position, muttering and glowering. Burns fouled out to catcher, and -Kelly, the Mannig shortstop, was thrown out at first, Conly and Nelson -each securing a change of base. When Kleinschmidt came to the plate, -what was earnestly required was a safe hit, and, being an obliging -chap, Kleinschmidt supplied it, sending the ball whizzing between first -and second basemen, and bringing in both Conly and Nelson. And Mannig’s -war whoop sounded excruciatingly. Harrison waited for something -pleasing, but waited a little bit too long, and the side was out. But -three to one looked very good to Mannig, and Burns begged Nelson to -hold the opponents down. - -By this time Nelson had forgotten his displeasure and went into the -box ready to do his level best. And he did it. The first two men -struck out like children, and, although the third reached his base on -a hit and an error of shortstop’s, the fourth batsman could do nothing -against Nelson’s puzzling delivery, and followed in the ignominious -footsteps of the first couple. And Mannig cheered and capered, and -showed very plainly that they were terribly pleased about something. - -It was in the fourth that Bob vindicated himself. Simpson fanned out. -Then Fultz, having reached first by being hit on the elbow with the -ball, stole second a moment later. Bob came to the plate and allowed -two deliveries to pass him. The umpire confirmed his judgment. With two -balls to his credit, he wasn’t going to accept any old thing, and so he -waited for Mr. Somes to oblige him with something nice. And while he -waited, the first real trouble occurred. - -Fultz, down on second, was keeping both second baseman and shortstop -very much worried. He had shown his ability at stealing bases, and they -were watching him as though he were a mouse, and they two very hungry -cats. That was all right, but when the shortstop, unseen by the umpire, -who was back of the pitcher, undertook to hold Fultz by the arm, the -runner objected. He not only objected, but showed the fact by sending -the Laurelville player over on his back by a well-applied shove. Then -the second baseman took a hand in the argument, and Fultz went down -with a blow on his jaw. At that moment the pitcher ran up with the -ball, and dug it, none too gently, into Fultz’s ribs, and, as Fultz was -reclining somewhat dazed a yard from base, Laurelville claimed that he -had been put out. - -But the umpire couldn’t see it that way. So time was called, and while -several incipient riots took place Mannig and Laurelville argued it -over angrily, each side threatening to take its team off the field. -Finally, the umpire took a hand at threatening. His threat was that -if they didn’t go on with the game at once, he’d award it to Mannig. -Whereupon the spectators were finally dispelled and the field cleared. - -The incident hadn’t increased the _entente cordiale_, and the opposing -players eyed each other angrily. But in a moment there was a diversion. -And Bob caused it. Others might have lost their heads for the time -being, but not Bob. Mr. Somes, still aggrieved, was off his guard for -an instant, and Bob took advantage of the fact. His bat met the nice, -straight ball with a loud _crack_, and in a moment he was speeding -around the bases, and Fultz, sufficiently recovered from his treatment -to be able to run, trotted leisurely across the plate in a disdainful -manner, which said as loudly as words, “It’s a shame to do it!” - -Away out, past center fielder, who was doing a lot of tall running, the -ball had dropped softly to the ground. Bob swung around second and made -for third. Center fielder reached the ball, scooped it up, and hustled -it toward shortstop, who had run out for it. Bob spurned third base -under flying feet and set his face homeward. A chaos of sound reigned. -Shortstop swung about and threw the ball frantically to the plate, -where the catcher, for what to him had seemed an age, had been awaiting -it with outstretched hands. - -Friends of Mannig held their breath. Ball and runner were both speeding -for the same goal. It had seemed at first that Bob was certain of a -home run, but the fielding had been extremely fast, and now it appeared -that he was doomed to have his trouble for nothing. If someone had only -had the sense to hold him at third base! - -Simultaneously two things happened. The flying sphere settled with a -thud against the catcher’s mitt, and Bob, sliding over the ground in a -cloud of brown dust, touched the plate with the fingers of one eager -hand. Then down came the catcher’s hand and the ball, like a sledge -hammer, and Bob straightened out his legs, rolled over on to his back, -and lay very still. - -In an instant the plate, the catcher, the umpire, and the unconscious -form of Bob formed the vortex of a pushing, shouting maelstrom of -humanity. Dan, who had been one of the first to reach Bob’s side, -strove to raise him from the ground for fear that the struggling crowd -would trample upon him, but so close about him were the angry partisans -of Mannig that he could only hold Bob in a sitting position, and beg -for room and air. The catcher, white of face, hemmed in by the enemy, -declared loudly that he had intended no harm, but he was no coward, and -his tone was so defiant that it only added to the wrath of the crowd. -The umpire strove mightily for peace. So far no blow had been struck, -although many hands were clinched and several arms were raised. The -catcher was being jostled back and forth as the throng swayed hither -and thither. Dan, by dint of much tugging, at last lifted Bob in his -arms, and, aided now by Burns and a stranger, fought a way through the -dense throng. Once on the bench, with a sopping towel at his head, Bob -soon regained consciousness and opened his eyes. - -“What’s up?” he asked weakly. - -“Oh, that blamed catcher took you in the side of the head with the -ball,” answered Dan angrily. - -“I know, but what”--he turned his head toward the shouting mass on the -diamond--“what’s doing over there?” - -“Free fight, I guess,” said Dan. - -“That’s what,” said Burns, the light of battle in his eye. “Look after -him and I’ll see if I can help.” - -With that he sped away and was lost in the throng which was pouring on -to the field from the stand. - -“He didn’t mean anything,” cried Bob. “It’s all nonsense. Here, let me -up, Dan!” - -He climbed to his feet, stood for an instant with blinking eyes, and -then, ere Dan could restrain him, was running toward the center of -the gathering. Dan, calling, followed. But it was hard work getting -through, and long before he reached the scene of trouble the war was -averted. - -Bob, shouldering his way into the struggling, shuffling mass with scant -ceremony, tore the catcher out of the hands of a big, ugly-faced tough. -Only one or two of the Laurelville players had managed to reach the -catcher’s side, and for an instant Bob was mistaken by the Mannigites -for another member of the enemy’s forces. A louder growl of rage went -up, but at that moment Bob lifted his voice above the pandemonium. - -“Get off the field!” he cried. “I’m not hurt! It was all an accident! -Please get out of the way and let us finish the game!” - -“Accident!” exclaimed an ugly, incredulous voice. “Looks like an -accident, don’t it?” - -Bob coolly passed a hand over the discolored lump on the side of his -head and smiled. - -“That’s all it was,” he replied. “Accidents will happen. If you don’t -get off the field at once, Laurelville will say we interfered with the -game and they couldn’t finish it. And as we haven’t played five innings -yet, we’ll get left!” - -“That’s so,” some one agreed. “Come on.” - -“Say, you’re a plucky one, kid!” cried another. - -Good nature returned, and, laughing and shoving, the throng fought its -way back. As it thinned away about the plate, the Laurelville captain -ran up. Seeing Bob, he turned and made for him. - -“Say, what’s the matter with you?” he cried, brandishing his fist -under Bob’s nose. “He didn’t mean to slug you, you baby! For two cents -I’d----” - -A hand shot out and swung him about. - -“Shut up, Jack!” growled the catcher. “He’s all right; he ain’t made -any kick; he’s just been telling his crowd it was an accident. It was -too.” He looked closely at Bob. Bob nodded. - -“Of course,” he answered. “I understand.” - -“Well, that’s all right,” said the captain a trifle sheepishly. “I -thought they were doing you up, Ted, old man.” - -“Well, I guess they would have if this fellow hadn’t butted in just -when he did,” answered the catcher dryly. He glanced at Bob. “Much -obliged,” he muttered. - -Presently order was restored once more and the game went on. Conly went -out at second, after knocking what he and everyone else thought was -a safe two-bagger, and Nelson fell prey to Somes’s deceptive drops. -And the teams changed sides with the score five to one, in favor of -Mannig. The fifth inning commenced with the Laurelville captain at -bat. He led off with a pop fly that ought to have been an easy out, -but which was muffed by Harrison at second. The next man advanced -the captain and went out at first. Then came a clean two-bagger that -brought Laurelville’s second tally. But after that there were no more -hits, and, with the score now five to two, Mannig once more took its -innings. But Burns, Kelly, and Kleinschmidt went out in quick order -without changing the figures. Laurelville trotted in to the bench, and -her captain hailed Burns. - -“Say,” he asked, “where’s that pitcher of yours come from?” - -“What difference does that make?” asked Burns. - -“It makes a lot of difference. He played with some New Hampshire team, -and you can’t get men from outside the State.” - -“Oh, come off! Who said so?” - -“It’s in the agreement,” was the reply. - -“I never saw it!” - -“Well, it’s there. And if you play that pitcher, we won’t go on with -the game.” - -“Oh, stop if you want to,” replied Burns sweetly. “I guess we’ve got it -cinched all right.” - -“We’ll protest it,” was the answer. “You haven’t any business playing -either that pitcher or the fellow in center.” - -“Why didn’t you say something about it before we beat you?” demanded -Burns angrily. - -“I didn’t know it,” was the answer. - -Burns hesitated, and then summoned Fultz. With Fultz went most of the -Mannig team. Thereupon the Laurelville players also joined the group, -scenting trouble. Finally, Fultz called to Nelson. - -“Say, where do you live?” he asked. - -“Boston.” - -“How about you, Hethington?” - -“Portland, Maine,” replied Bob. - -“All right,” answered Fultz. “I suppose we’ll have to drop ’em. But I -never heard of the fool rule before! We’ll beat you, anyway,” he added -wrathfully. - -“Go ahead,” said the Laurelville captain cheerfully. “But you can’t -come any tricks like that on us. I guess we’ve got a good right to -claim the game as it is. You’ve played those fellows for five innings -already.” - -“Protest all you like,” answered Burns. “If you didn’t want them to -play, you ought to have said so.” - -Fultz turned to Nelson and Bob. - -“They say we haven’t any right to play fellows from outside the State,” -he explained. “First I ever knew it. I’m sorry. And we hate to lose you -chaps. But I guess you’ve done pretty well for us. We’re much obliged, -and if you want to change your mind about the pay, we’re still ready to -hand over the money. I’ll see you after the game.” - -Nelson and Bob retired to the bench. Neither of them was sorry to get -out of the game. Bob’s head was aching a good deal, and Nelson’s arm -was beginning to feel pretty sore. - -“Think they can hold that lead of three runs?” asked Bob. - -“I don’t believe so,” Nelson replied. “Depends a good deal on their -pitcher. Who is he?” - -“A chap named Sullivan,” answered Bob. “Pretty poor, I guess.” - -“Well, let’s stay and see it out, anyway. Hello, you chaps!” he added, -as Dan and Tom came up. - -“Hello, yourself,” replied Dan. “What’s the row?” - -Nelson explained, and Tom was highly indignant. - -“Ho-ho-ho-hope they ch-ch-ch--” he began. - -“Yes, indeed, Tommy,” said Bob soothingly, “but I don’t believe they -will choke. They may get beaten, but they probably won’t choke.” - -“You might run over and suggest it to them, though,” said Dan -hopefully. “They might be willing to oblige you.” - -It soon began to look bad for Mannig. The new pitcher was fast, and -at times puzzling, but he was terribly wild. Conly alone saved his -team from utter rout for a while, stopping many a wild pitch. Then -things began to happen. With one out, Laurelville located the ball, and -started to hammer it to all parts of the diamond. Only the best sort of -fielding kept her from forging ahead then and there. With three men on -bases and but one out, it surely looked for a while as though Mannig’s -sun was about to set. But heady, fast work on the part of the infield -spoiled Laurelville’s chances, and only one run was added to her score -in that inning. But Laurelville trotted out looking hopeful. Next time, -they hoped, they would have better luck. As the Mannig players returned -to the bench, it was plain to be seen that they feared defeat. Fultz -threw himself down beside Dan. - -“Gee!” he said. “That was a narrow squeak, wasn’t it?” - -“It surely was,” answered Dan. “You fellows did great work.” - -“Yes, that was a dandy double.” - -Presently Dan said: - -“Seems like you are playing against the Laurelville Fire Department.” - -Fultz looked puzzled. - -“What do you mean?” he asked. - -“Oh, a chap over there in the crowd was telling me about it awhile -ago,” answered Dan. “He says more than half the nine are firemen. They -have a volunteer department here, you know. He was wondering what would -happen if an alarm was rung in. He said he bet the Laurelville captain -would let the old town burn up.” - -And Dan chuckled at the idea. - -“Did he say just how many belonged to the Fire Department?” asked Fultz -carelessly. - -“Yes, he said seven out of the twelve players and subs. He told me who -they were, but I didn’t pay any attention.” - -“Well, I’m on deck,” said Fultz. “Guess I’ll find my bat.” - -But Dan, smiling at his thoughts, noticed that the manager had -apparently changed his mind. For, instead of going to where the bats -were piled, he walked around the bench and across to where a group of -Mannig citizens were watching the contest from the grass back of third -base. There he stooped and spoke to a youth in a dingy suit of clothes. -Presently the youth arose, and he and Fultz wandered away together -toward the end of the grand stand. As the Mannig batsman was at that -moment making his second abortive strike at the ball, it is doubtful if -anyone save Dan noticed them. They conversed together a moment at the -corner of the stand, and then the youth lounged away out of sight, and -Fultz returned and selected his bat. When he had it he turned quickly -and glanced at Dan. Dan was apparently absorbed in the fate of the -batter. - -That was speedily decided, for he couldn’t resist a slow drop that had -every appearance of a straight ball, and turned disgustedly away to -toss his bat into the pile. But after that Mannig’s chances appeared to -brighten. With only one man out, she managed to get runners on second -and third, and for a time it looked as though she was about to pile up -some more tallies. The Mannig contingent became wildly enthusiastic, -and their excruciating war whoop filled the air. But their hopes were -doomed to disappointment, for the two runners were obliged to stay just -where they were while the succeeding pair of batsmen struck ignobly -out. And now the seventh inning began with the score five to three, in -favor of the visitors. - -Once more the Laurelville players found Sullivan an easy riddle. The -first man up let drive a sizzling grounder between shortstop and third -baseman, and, by good running, barely made second ahead of the ball. -The following batter worried the pitcher until in the end he was sent -to first on four balls. Laurelville was yelling and whooping at a great -rate. - -“Here’s where we score!” cried the coachers back of first and third. -“Any old thing will do, Eddie! A nice little three-bagger, if you can! -You can’t miss ’em! He’s easy, he is! On your toes there, Jack! Down -with his arm, old man! _Hey!_” - -Then the third batsman cracked out a nice safe hit that was just two -feet out of first baseman’s reach, and although right fielder managed -to get the ball to the plate in time to send the foremost runner -doubling back to third, the bases were full, and there were no outs. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII - -IN WHICH A FIRE ALARM AIDS MANNIG, AND THE FOUR LEAVE HURRIEDLY - - -Things looked bad, indeed, for the visiting team. The watchers on the -grand stand were on their feet, shouting continuously. Not a few were -joining the throng on the turf, scurrying to places along the base -lines. Sullivan was plainly rattled, and his first delivery went so -wild that Conly, try as he might, could not reach it. In raced the -runner from third, and, close behind him, the second man. But although -the first reached home safely the other met with misfortune, and was -nailed a yard from the plate. But that was only one out, there was -still a man on third, and the score was five to four. And, another -factor in Laurelville’s favor, her captain and best batsman was facing -Sullivan with a cool, smiling face. One run would tie the score; two -would give the home team the lead. What wonder, then, that Laurelville -went wild with delight, and utterly forsook the grand stand? - -Conly and Sullivan met midway between plate and pitcher’s box, and -conferred in whispers to an accompaniment of derisive jeers from the -supporters of the Green-and-White. Then the pitcher returned to his -place, twirled his arms, and shot the ball forward. - -_Bang!_ - -The Laurelville captain had caught it for a nice bunt toward first -base, a slow-rolling, erratic bunt that sent pitcher and first baseman -scurrying for it. And in from third raced the runner. But Simpson found -the ball speedily, scooped it up, and with the same movement sent it in -to catcher. The runner from third saw defeat before him and drew up. -Then he turned back, and in a twinkling catcher and third baseman were -running him down between them. He turned and twisted while the ball -flew back and forth above his head until, at last, almost hemmed in, he -made a desperate lunge toward third, sent Burns staggering aside out -of his path, and reached his refuge in safety. Burns angrily picked up -the ball which had been jostled from his hand, while the Laurelville -supporters cheered and shouted. For, although there had been, contrary -to their captain’s expectations, no tally, the captain himself was -sitting calmly on the bag at second. Then once more Fortune turned her -back on the wearers of the Blue. Sullivan struck the next man with -the ball, and after he had been rubbed and condoled with by half the -Laurelville team, he went limping and grinning to first and filled the -bases again! - -Once more Conly strove to calm the erratic Sullivan, and once more the -crowd hooted as catcher and pitcher whispered together. Then Sullivan -went back and faced the next batsman. Up shot his arms, and forward -sped the sphere. - -“Ball!” droned the umpire. - -Again, and, - -“Two balls!” was the verdict. - -“Pick out a good one!” called the captain from where he was dancing -about at second. And the coaches shrieked and leaped in their efforts -to further disturb the equanimity of the already badly rattled pitcher. -Sullivan rubbed a hand in the dirt, wiped it on his trousers, and -settled the ball in it carefully, striving to collect himself. - -“Take your time, Jim!” called Conly cheerfully. “Plenty of time, old -man!” - -But there wasn’t, for at that moment from the center of town came the -wild alarm of a clanging fire bell! - -For an instant everyone stood as though turned to stone; everyone save -the Mannig pitcher. Perhaps he didn’t hear. At all events he shot the -ball across the plate, right over the very center of it, and the umpire -called a strike. And, as though that had been the signal, all the -Laurelville players began shouting at once. Down on second the captain -was calling wildly for “Time.” The umpire was surrounded by half a -dozen players each explaining breathlessly. So “Time” was announced. -Fultz came racing in from center field. - -“What’s time taken out for?” he cried. - -“Fire!” shouted the Laurelville captain, looking excitedly about for -his cap. - -“What’s that got to do with the game?” demanded Fultz. - -“Why, we’re most of us members of the company,” was the reply. “We’ll -go on with the game after a bit. Come on, fellows! We’ll have to run -for it!” - -And led by their redoubtable captain the Laurelville Baseball Team -streaked off the field in the direction of the town. And behind it -hurried most of the spectators, for a fire promised far greater -excitement than even a baseball game. The Mannig players trotted up -with surprised expressions on their faces, demanding to know what the -trouble was. Burns turned to the umpire. - -“Mr. Umpire,” he said, “we’re ready to go on with the game.” - -The umpire looked nonplused. - -“Er--well, we’ll wait awhile and then, if the other team doesn’t show -up, I’ll have to call the game.” - -In five minutes the field was deserted save for the Mannig players -and a handful of Mannig supporters. Everyone else was scurrying along -the road leading to town. Dan, a quiet smile on his face, drew Nelson -aside. - -“Let’s get out of this,” he whispered. “It’s not going to be healthy -around here after a bit. Let’s move on to the next town.” - -Nelson looked perplexedly at Dan’s smiling countenance for a moment. -Then, scenting mischief, he nodded and went in search of Tom and Bob. -Without explaining, he announced that they were breaking camp, and in a -twinkling the Four were following the crowd. On the way Dan told what -he knew about it, and the others laughed until the tears streamed down -their dusty faces--all save Bob. Bob smiled a bit, but he shook his -head too. - -“It’s kind of a low trick, Dan,” he said. - -“But I didn’t do it,” protested Dan. “I merely told Fultz what I had -heard. It wasn’t my fault if----” - -“But you expected him to do it!” - -“What of it? Of course I expected him to; it was just the sort of a -trick I’d expect these muckers to do!” - -“That sounds well from you,” answered Bob dryly. - -“Oh, get out! I didn’t tell him to do it; I didn’t even suggest it! -Why, when that bell rang I was so surprised----!” - -Bob had to laugh in spite of himself. - -“Well, just at present what we’ve got to do is to get our things from -the hotel before the irate citizens of this charming village discover -that they’ve been hoaxed! And I move that we move faster!” - -And they did. When they reached the hotel they found it deserted save -for a sixteen-year-old boy, the proprietor’s son, who was evidently not -staying there from inclination. They found him on the sidewalk, looking -longingly toward where at the far end of the main street a confused -rabble was pouring around a distant corner. - -“Where’s the fire?” asked Dan. - -“I don’t know exactly,” was the excited reply, “but it’s somewhere over -by the railroad.” - -“How far is that?” asked Dan. - -“Pretty near a mile. And they say it’s a daisy! Maybe it’s Tompkins’s -lumber yard!” - -The Four heaved sighs of relief. Before Tompkins’s lumber yard was -reached by the valiant fire fighters they hoped to be well on their -road. Very quickly they rescued their packs, slung them on their -shoulders, and, to use Tom’s expression, “hit the trail.” Once out of -sight of the hotel they paused while Bob consulted his map. - -“Cupples’ Harbor is three miles,” announced Bob. “That’s where we’d -better make for.” - -“All right,” responded Nelson, with a laugh. “Any place out of here!” - -“How do we go?” Dan asked. - -“Straight ahead and turn to the left about four blocks down,” was the -reply. So straight ahead they went, and allowed no grass to grow under -their feet. When they had almost reached their turning they heard a -great noise behind, and paused to see what it was. Down the street -trotted the two Mannig coaches filled with their exultant passengers. -The Mannig war whoop aroused the echoes of the almost deserted town. - -“The umpire’s called the game,” chuckled Dan. - -When the first coach was abreast of them they were recognized and -loudly cheered. They waved their hands in response while the occupants -of the coaches showered unintelligible messages upon them. But as the -second load went by, one remark met their ears which they understood. -Fultz, beaming and red of face, leaned far out over the side, made a -megaphone of his hands, and shouted: - -“You fellows had better get out of here pretty quick!” - -Dan winked merrily. - -“Trust us!” he shouted back. - -The fire bell which had been ringing incessantly for ten minutes -stopped suddenly as the Four turned from the main street and smelled -the salt air from the ocean. In ten minutes they were well out of -Laurelville, and slackened their pace. - -“What’ll happen?” asked Tom. “When they find out, I mean.” - -“They’ll be so mad they won’t be able to see straight,” chuckled Dan. -“And if they find any Mannig citizen roaming around, they’ll probably -make life very interesting for him!” - -“Do you suppose they’ll be able to prove that Mannig did it?” asked Bob. - -“Sure to. They’ll find that the fellow who brought the alarm was a -stranger, and guess at once.” - -“Still, I don’t see how they are going to prove it!” - -“Well, maybe they won’t,” allowed Dan. “But there’s one thing you can -bet on, and that is, no matter whether Mannig gets the purse or not, -there won’t be any more baseball games between the two towns for a -while!” - -“And a good thing too!” said Nelson. “That sort of baseball makes me -tired!” - -They reached Cupples’ Harbor at a little before six, very hungry, and -somewhat tired. After supper Dan said: - -“Say, do you fellows realize that it’s just a week since we left New -York?” - -“A week!” shouted Tom. - -“Get out!” said Nelson. “It seems a month!” - -“It surely does,” Bob agreed. “But we’ve had a pretty good time so far, -haven’t we?” - -“Dandy!” said Tom. Nelson laughed. - -“We’re forgetting about being robbed, and going hungry, and all the -rest of it!” - -“That’s so,” answered Dan. “Gee! Weren’t we a disgusted lot the day we -trailed into Millford? For two cents I’d have jumped a train and gone -home!” - -“Guess that was the way with all of us,” said Bob. “Only we didn’t have -the two cents!” - -The next morning when they tumbled out of their beds they found the -rain dashing against the windows, and an old-fashioned sou’easter -having things pretty much its own way. To continue their journey in the -face of such a storm was out of the question, and so they got their -soiled clothes together, and made arrangements to have them washed in -the hotel, and dried in time for them to go on the next day. - -There were few guests left, and the Four had the house almost to -themselves that day. After breakfast they got into their rubber -ponchos, and braved the tempest. The surf was fine, and they watched -a long time from the shelter of an old hut on the point, about a mile -from the hotel. They got pretty wet, but it was great fun; and the -roaring fire in the hotel soon dried them off after they got back. The -rest of the day passed quickly enough with books and cards, and they -went early to bed. - -The next morning the rain still fell, but the wind had died away, and -after a consultation they decided to go on. Their clean clothes were -brought up to them, and after they had put some of them on, Nelson -said he felt respectable for the first time in three days. The walking -was hard, but they did five miles by half-past eleven, and stopped at -Seapoint for luncheon or dinner, whichever it might turn out to be. It -happened to be dinner, and, as they were all frightfully hungry, they -ate a good deal, and felt very little like continuing their journey -afterwards. Tom was for spending the night where they were, but he -was overruled, and at two o’clock they set out for Beach Neck, eight -miles farther east. The rain, which had once or twice sobered down to a -drizzle, now held up entirely, although the clouds still hung low and -ominous. The road, however, constantly got worse, and it was slow going. - -“I see where we get a late dinner to-night,” said Dan, at about three -o’clock. “I’ll bet we haven’t gone two miles in the last hour!” - -“Told you we’d ought to stay where we were,” said Tom. - -“And I guess you were right, Tommy, my boy. Never say die, though!” And -Dan hitched his pack into place, and trudged on. By four, they were -still but little more than halfway to Beach Neck, and Bob got his map -out. - -“Well,” asked Nelson, “is there any sign of civilization around here?” - -“Not very near,” answered Bob. “But, say, the railroad strikes the road -near here somewhere--just beyond, I guess--and it’s lots nearer than -the road we’re on.” - -“Nearer what?” - -“I mean it’s shorter that way to Beach Neck than it is by the road.” - -“Gee! Then let’s take it!” - -“Railroads are mighty hard walking, though,” said Tom. - -“Can’t be much harder than this sloppy, sandy quagmire,” said Dan. “I -move we hit the ties.” - -So they did when, as presently happened, the railroad came into sight -and ran along the highway in a neighborly fashion for a little way. -It was hard walking, as Tom had predicted, especially at first. But -after awhile they got into what Dan called “the swing of it,” and it -wasn’t so bad. At least, as Bob pointed out, it was a deal drier. But -Tom answered that he didn’t see that that counted for much, because his -feet were sopping wet already. - -Half an hour later, without any warning, the rain started in again in a -fashion that almost took their breath away. It came down in torrents, -so that they could see scarcely a yard ahead of them, and made such a -racket, besides, that Bob called a halt. - -“Look here,” he gasped, “we can’t see nor hear anything, and this track -isn’t a healthful place for us; a train could come along and knock us -into the next county without our getting so much as a hint of it.” - -They were at the beginning of a little cut, where the track had been -built through a wooded hill. - -“Gee!” sputtered Tom, and stumbled down the embankment to the side -of the track. The others followed. The raindrops lashed their rubber -ponchos, drenched their heads, and trickled down their backs. Barry, -with what remained of his tail tucked as far under him as it would go, -sought shelter from the pelting drops at Dan’s feet. - -“Let’s break for cover!” shouted Nelson. - -They broke. Nelson led the way, stumbling along what at one time -had been an embankment, on which a spur track had run a few hundred -yards to a gravel quarry. The quarry had become almost obliterated -with underbrush and trees, and it was under one of the largest of the -latter that the Four finally drew up, panting. The hill rose abruptly -behind them, but the sheets of rain were so dense that they could make -out but little of their surroundings. The tree, a young maple with -wide-spreading branches, kept the worst of the torrent off them for the -moment. - -“These ponchos are all very nice,” said Dan, “but they have their -limitations. I’ll bet you’d get six gallons of water out of me if you -wrung me. Can’t we find a better place than this? The roof’s leaking, -and the merry little raindrops are playing tag down my back.” - -“How far do you suppose we are from Beach Neck?” asked Nelson. - -“At least a mile,” answered Bob. “You fellows stay here a minute, and -I’ll look around and see if there isn’t a better shelter.” - -He brought the poncho closer about his neck, and retied it. - -“If I yell, you answer. I may get lost in this drizzle.” - -Then he stepped out from under the tossing, dripping branches, and was -lost to sight almost instantly. The others waited silently, their hands -in their pockets for warmth. After awhile Bob shouted, and presently -rejoined them. - -“I’ve found an old shed or something over here. Come on.” - -He led the way at a run, and they raced after him, gasping for breath -as the solid curtains of rain dashed into their faces. Then they were -under the lee of a building, Bob was wrenching open a door which hung -from one leather hinge, and in a moment they were inside, blinking the -water from their eyes. At first it was too dark in there to see much, -but presently as they became accustomed to it they began to make out -objects in the gray gloom. - -The hut, for it was scarcely more, was about twenty feet long and -twelve feet wide. There was one door, through which they had entered, -and two windows, one still containing the remnants of a sash, and -the other having been roughly boarded up. Along the back of the hut -remnants of a double tier of wooden bunks remained. In the center -of the floor, resting on four bricks, was a rusty stove. At one time -there had been a pipe leading through the roof, as the round hole -there indicated. But now the pipe was gone, and the hole leaked water -like a spout. The place was littered with rubbish, old newspapers, tin -cans, and bottles, a broken pick, and a worn-out pair of overalls. -Bob lighted a match, and they explored, kicking their way through the -_débris_. - -“Not what you’d call a first-class hotel,” observed Dan. - -“No,” said Tom. “And it’s evidently very much on the European plan.” - -“Unless you can eat tin cans, Tommy,” answered Bob. “But it’s dry, -anyhow, and that’s something. And seems to me we might manage a fire in -that stove with some of this truck.” - -“We’ll be smoked out.” - -“We might leave the door open. Anyhow, let’s see.” - -So they stuffed the old stove full of paper, added a few pieces of wood -which they found, and touched it off. It was smoky, there was no doubt -about that, but it looked cheerful, and after a minute or two even gave -some warmth. The rain drove in through the door at times, and prevented -the smoke from going out, but save that it occasioned an epidemic of -coughing, the fire was quite a success. - -“Let’s see if we can’t get some of that wood from the bunks,” suggested -Nelson. - -It was hard work until Dan thought of the broken pick. He showed that -a pick may be used as an ax when occasion demands, and soon they had -quite a respectable pile of firewood by the stove. Bob borrowed the -implement, and tore off the boarding from the window, thus supplying -more fuel, and creating a cross draught that cleared a good deal of the -smoke out. By this time the stove was getting red hot, and they stood -around it, having thrown aside their ponchos, and steamed and regained -their good humor. - -“Say, Nel,” asked Dan, “what does this remind you of?” - -“Turkish bath,” answered Nelson. - -“No, but do you remember the hut in the woods at Chicora last summer? -This rain’s a dead ringer for that one, except that there isn’t any -thunder and lightning.” - -“Don’t suggest it,” warned Bob. - -“Yes, and do you remember how scared you were at that skeleton?” -laughed Nelson. - -“You don’t say?” drawled Dan. “I guess I wasn’t the only one who was -scared. If Bob hadn’t grabbed you as you went through the door, you’d -have been running yet.” - -“Pshaw!” said Nelson with a grin. “I wasn’t scared; I was just going -for assistance.” - -“I suppose there’s no supper for us to-night,” said Tom hopelessly. - -“Supper? What do you want supper for?” asked Bob. “Didn’t you eat -enough dinner to last you a week?” - -“We’re a lot of idiots not to keep some chocolate or something of that -sort in our pockets,” said Nelson. “You bet that when I get to a store -I’m going to lay in a supply.” - -“Wish I had some now,” wailed Tom. - -“We might eat Barry,” suggested Bob. - -“You might get killed too,” said Dan grimly. “This old rain will have -to hold up after a while.” - -“It’s holding us up just at present,” observed Nelson. - -And apparently it was contented to continue doing that, for the open -doorway turned from a misty-gray oblong to a black, and still the -downpour continued. There wasn’t a watch among them, and so they had no -way of telling time. - -“Well,” said Bob, filling the stove up again, “we’ve got a dry place -to sleep, and that’s something. I vote we go to bed as soon as we can -sleep, and get an early start. Beach Neck can’t be far off, and we can -make up for supper at the breakfast table.” - -“Sounds good to me,” answered Dan. “But I’m not the least bit sleepy; -only hungry.” - -“Same here,” murmured Tom wistfully. He was sitting on the floor as -near to the stove as he could get without scorching, and Barry was -curled up in his lap. “If you and I had a dog biscuit, Barry, we could -do a dandy trick with it, couldn’t we?” - -But Barry only wagged his stump of tail drowsily. - -“He’s the only philosophic one among us,” said Nelson. “He didn’t have -a tenth as much dinner as we did, and look at him! Not a whimper!” - -Whereupon Barry suddenly sat up, pricked his ears, and growled. Bob and -Tom began to laugh, but Dan held up his hand. - -“Wait a minute!” he whispered. “Barry hears something.” - -The dog slipped stealthily from Tom’s lap and moved toward the door, -sniffing and growling. They listened and watched. Then simultaneously -Barry broke into fierce barking, and a face appeared in the dark frame -of the doorway. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII - -TELLS OF AN ADVENTURE IN A HUT - - -Tom scrambled to his feet, Barry retreated, still barking and growling -furiously, with the hair on his neck and along his back standing -straight up, and the newcomer stumbled through the doorway, wiping his -face, and peering nervously about in the half-light. - -“Who’s here?” he muttered. “Mind your dog, can’t yer? Think I want to -be bit?” - -There was no answer. The boys were looking at each other with wide -eyes. Then, quietly, Bob stole to the door and pulled it to. Dan seized -Barry in his arms. - -“A wet night,” observed Dan politely. - -“_Wet!_” muttered the new arrival angrily. He was rubbing the water -from his eyes, and striving to get a look at the other occupants of the -hut. “I’m nigh drowned, I am! Wet, says you!” - -“Come up to the fire,” continued Nelson, drawing back into the shadows -as though to make room. Then Dan handed the dog to Tom and edged around -the other side of the stove. Bob had left the door, and now, as the -newcomer shuffled toward the stove, casting wary, suspicious glances -into the shadows where the boys hovered, he crept around back of him. -As noiselessly as he moved, however, the other heard, and started to -turn. But he was too late. Bob made a diving tackle that pinioned the -man’s arms to his sides, and together they crashed to the floor, Bob -uppermost. In a twinkle Nelson and Dan were beside him, and the man -underneath might well have cried “Down!” Barry, gurgling and yelping, -struggled and fought in Tom’s arms, and the noise was deafening for a -moment, the captive contributing not a little to the sum of it. Then, - -“Hand me a couple of towels, Tom,” called Bob, and Tom, dropping Barry, -fished the desired articles from his crowded pockets. They weren’t very -generous towels, but they served their present purpose. The man was -flopped, fighting hard, over on to his face, and his hands were tied -securely behind him. Then Dan arose gingerly from his struggling legs, -and the second towel was applied neatly at his ankles. - -“Now another towel, Tommy, or--hold on! A pair of socks’ll do just as -well,” said Bob. - -Tom fished a pair from another pocket, and Bob jammed them into the -man’s mouth, silencing at last the flood of unpleasant language. -Meanwhile Nelson was kept busy fighting Barry off, for the terrier’s -fighting blood was roused, and he was aching to take part in the -proceedings. Then they rolled the captive over on to his back and stood -up, panting. - -“There, my friend,” said Bob, brushing his clothes. “That’ll hold you -for a while, I guess. You’ve encountered us about once too often. -It’s a pretty good idea to have a look at your host before you accept -hospitality.” - -The man, the same ugly-faced individual who had been “treed” by Barry -in the hotel at Barrington, and subsequently brought to earth by Nelson -on the stairs, moved not an eyelash, but if looks could have killed, it -would have been all up with Bob. - -“Now, what’ll we do with him?” asked Nelson, reaching for his tie, -which had worked around under his left ear during the fracas. - -“Search him first of all,” answered Bob. - -The captive’s eyelids flickered. Dan whistled. - -“By Jove!” he said. “I hadn’t thought of that!” - -“Do you suppose he’s got anything left?” asked Nelson. - -“I don’t know, but I propose to find out,” answered Bob. “Lend a hand, -you fellows, and look carefully.” - -“Bu-bu-bu-bet you he’s spent the money,” stammered Tom, whose duty at -the moment was to refrain Barry from doing murder. - -“Maybe,” said Bob. He moved over to the thief. “Now, my friend, you -stole about sixty-nine dollars from us, and two watches.” - -The head shook vehemently. - -“Oh, yes, you did,” answered Bob. “Although if you hadn’t been fool -enough to leave a message behind you we wouldn’t have known it was you, -and you wouldn’t be in your present fix. It ought to be a lesson to you -not to rush into print--or writing, either. You’re not the first man -who’s got into trouble through writing a letter. Now then!” - -They ripped open his ragged coat, and went through the pockets, but -the only things to reward their search were a sandwich wrapped in a -piece of newspaper, a piece of lead pipe, about four inches long, with -a short length of rope run through it for a handle, some tobacco and a -corncob pipe, a ragged red bandanna handkerchief, and a handsome new -clasp knife. - -“Shows where some of the money went,” commented Dan. - -Then they searched his trousers. From a hip pocket came a half-filled, -yellow glass bottle. Bob sniffed it, and threw it across the hut. - -“Whisky, I guess,” he muttered. “Smells bad enough.” - -At that moment Nelson gave a shout, and held up his gold watch. - -“Bully!” cried Dan. - -“Fine!” said Bob. “You don’t happen to find mine, do you?” - -“Not yet,” answered Nelson, slipping his own watch into his pocket. -“Wonder what he did with it.” - -“Well, it isn’t here,” said Dan. “Let’s ask the scoundrel.” - -Bob drew the gag out of the man’s mouth. - -“Where’s the other watch?” he demanded. - -“Where you won’t get it,” was the sullen answer. - -“What did you do with it?” - -There was a flood of blasphemy for reply. - -“Oh, shut him up again,” said Dan in disgust. “If you’ll let me take -those towels off so he can stand up, I’ll knock the tar out of him!” - -Bob replaced the gag after a struggle, and the search went on. But -there was no sign of any money save six coppers which Nelson fished out -of a trousers pocket. - -“Well, I’m glad you got your watch,” said Bob, as they stopped work for -want of any further recesses to search. - -“Wish I had my twenty-six dollars,” said Tom longingly. - -“I suppose he blew it in somewhere,” said Dan. - -“He’s only had five days to do it,” said Nelson thoughtfully. “It’s -more likely he’s hidden it somewhere.” - -“We might make a bargain with him,” said Bob. - -“What sort of a bargain?” - -“Tell him we’ll let him go if he’ll tell us where the money is.” - -“I wouldn’t believe him,” answered Dan. - -“And I don’t know that we’ve got any right to let him go,” said Nelson. -“He’s a thief and ought to be in jail.” - -“Well, we’ve got the right,” answered Bob. “We gave the police a fair -chance to catch him, and I don’t believe they ever tried. And now we’ve -caught him ourselves, without their help, and we’ve got a right to do -what we want with him.” - -“Sure,” agreed Tom. - -“Shall I give him the chance?” Bob asked. The others hesitated a -moment. Then Dan nodded, and, - -“All right,” said Nelson. - -“Well, what do you say?” asked Bob, turning to the thief. “If you’ll -tell us truthfully where you’ve hidden the money, we’ll let you -go--after we’ve found it.” - -There was no sign from the captive. - -“What do you say?” asked Bob impatiently. - -The captive wriggled his head. - -“He can’t talk with the gag in his mouth,” said Dan. “Here!” - -He stooped down and removed it. - -“Well?” said Bob again. - -“I spent ther money,” growled the man. “I’m sorry. ’Twon’t do you -fellers no good to put me in jail. Lemme go an’ I’ll clear out o’ here -and stay.” - -“You’re wrong,” answered Bob grimly. “It’ll do us a heap of good to put -you in jail. And that’s what we’re going to do. Stuff the socks back, -Dan.” - -“Hold on a minute!” said the captive. “How do I know you’ll lemme go?” - -“You’ll have to trust us, I guess,” answered Bob. - -“Swear yer’ll do it?” - -“No,” answered Bob sharply. “But we _tell_ you so; and that’ll have to -be enough.” - -The thief stared up at them in silence for a minute. Then, - -“All right,” he muttered at last. “It’s in my left boot--all that’s -left of it.” - -Nelson was tugging at the wet lacings before he had finished speaking. - -“Give me that knife a minute, Dan,” he said. Dan handed him the -captive’s clasp knife, and Nelson cut the soaking strings, and drew off -the boot. In the heel, a damp bundle, lay some bills. Nelson, followed -by the others, moved to the light of the stove and counted them. - -“Thirty-five dollars,” he announced finally. - -“About half,” said Bob. “Well, that’s not so bad. It’ll pay for our -night’s lodging.” - -Nelson stuffed the money in his pocket. - -“Let’s try the other,” he said. - -“Other what?” asked Dan. - -“Boot, you idiot!” - -“There’s nothin’ in the other one,” said the man eagerly. “Give yer my -word!” - -“Don’t want it, thanks,” answered Nelson as he cut the laces. The -captive began to swear again, and Dan promptly stuffed Tom’s socks into -place again. Nelson drew off the second wet boot and extracted another -wad of bills. - -“Twenty-two,” he said. “That makes fifty-seven in all. That’s not so -bad, fellows. I guess we can afford to call quits with our friend -there. He’s welcome to what he got away with, I guess.” - -“He hasn’t got any more boots, has he?” asked Tom. - -“Untie him now,” said Nelson, “and let him put his boots on again, and -get out of here as soon as he knows how. He deserves to go to jail, but -we promised to let him off.” - -“When we let him go,” suggested Tom, “let’s let Barry go too! What do -you say?” - -“I say no,” answered Dan. “Barry might bite him.” - -“It would serve him right,” said Tom. - -“Maybe; but I don’t want Barry poisoned,” replied Dan with a grin. - -They untied the man’s hands, and stood back while he unloosed his -ankles and drew the sodden boots on. He said no word during the -operation, but the sullen, hopeless look on his pinched face made even -Tom uncomfortable. Tom had seized the broken pick when they had untied -the thief as though resolved to sell his life dearly. - -“Put that thing down,” said Bob disgustedly. - -“He may get tr-tr-troublesome!” - -“Hope he does,” was the savage reply. “I only wish he’d give me an -excuse to lick him! We’ve no business letting him loose on the--er----” - -“Community,” assisted Dan. - -But as the man tied the cut laces together and crawled to his feet they -could not help feeling a sort of sneaking sympathy for him. He was a -forlorn specimen of humanity, with a pale, drawn face and little, dull, -blue eyes that just now were fixed almost affrightedly on the door -against which the storm still dashed in torrents. He rubbed his chilled -hands together, looked longingly at the stove and then at Dan. Dan -nodded silently, and he shuffled to the warmth and held his hands out. - -“Where are you going?” asked Dan. - -“I dunno,” answered the thief. “What’s it to you? You got all’s comin’ -to yer, ain’t yer?” - -“We have what belongs to us,” answered Dan quietly. “Why don’t you go -home and behave yourself?” - -“Home!” said the other bitterly. “Fellers like me don’t have no homes, -you fool!” - -Dan was silent. The thief blinked at the red stove, coughing in the -smoke. Then, - -“You fellers ain’t treated me bad,” he said huskily. “I ain’t got -nothin’ against yer. I s’pose yer think I’m pretty low down, but I got -my principles, same as you have, only they ain’t the same, I s’pose. I -ain’t never done mean to no friend, I ain’t. Nobody can’t say I don’t -act square. That sounds funny to you fellers, maybe; we’re different; -you’re gen’lemen; I never had no chance to be a gen’leman; I never had -no chance to be anythin’ but what I am. I’m sorry I took yer dough, -boys, ’cause you treated me fair, an’ it ain’t very often I gets -treated fair; folks don’t think it’s worth while to act square with a -feller like me. I’m just a hobo, an’ it’s fair game to kick a hobo when -yer gets ther chance. We steals ’cause we has to; there ain’t nothin’ -else we can do. Folks says why don’t you go to work? Who’d have us? -The world ain’t treatin’ us fair, I tells yer that, boys! It keeps a -blamed good watch on us when we’re growed up, but when we’re kids, an’ -starvin’ and learnin’ to steal ’cause there ain’t no other way we can -live, the world don’t bother about us. I know what I’m talkin’ about, -I do. Look after ther kids if yer don’t want hobos, that’s the game. -Well, I didn’t mean fer ter give yer no lecture, boys. I ain’t got no -kick against yous; you’ve treated me all right, I guess.” - -He buttoned his threadbare coat around his throat, thrust his hands in -his pockets, and moved toward the door. - -“Wait a minute,” said Nelson. He took the roll of bills from his pocket -and selected one. “Take this,” he said. “It’ll keep you going for a -while.” - -The thief took it, looked at it, and thrust it into his pocket quickly -as though fearing Nelson might change his mind. - -“Thanks,” he muttered. - -“Before you go,” said Bob, “I wish you’d tell me one thing, just to -satisfy my curiosity. What became of the other watch, the silver one?” - -“I give it away,” answered the other sullenly. - -“Gave it away? Who to?” - -“To a feller I met at Millford, a hobo like me. He was down on his -luck, and I knowed he could get a couple of plunks fer it; so I give it -to him. I’m sorry, I guess, if you wants it bad.” - -“Never mind,” answered Bob. “I just wondered where it was.” - -Bob moved to the door and pushed it open. A gust of rain dashed in and -drenched the floor, sending the smoke whirling about the room. Outside -a veritable wall of water showed in the glimmering light. The thief -shivered, cast a backward glance at the stove, and plunged out into the -darkness and the storm. Bob stood motionless for an instant. Then, - -“Oh, thunder!” he growled, and sprang after the man. In a second -he was back, pushing the thief before him. He looked at the others -apologetically. “I can’t help it, fellows,” he said. “We can’t send even -a dog out into a storm like that.” He turned to the man. “If we let you -sleep here, will you behave yourself?” he demanded. - -The thief turned on him almost savagely. - -“Ain’t I told yer I acts white to my friends?” he cried with an oath. -“Gimme a corner an’ I won’t trouble no one.” - -Bob glanced at the others questioningly. They nodded one after another. -Nelson stooped and busied himself putting fresh wood into the stove. -The thief scraped some rubbish together in a corner of the room, and -laid himself down upon it. The boys gathered around the fire and talked -together in low voices for a while. Then they laid themselves down on -the bare floor, and with their ponchos over them went to sleep, Barry -nestling up to Dan with a final good-night growl at the silent form in -the corner. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX - -TELLS OF A VOYAGE AND A SHIPWRECK - - -They awoke shortly before seven, aching and chilled and stiff, to find -the sun pouring in through the windows of the hut. - -“He’s gone,” said Bob. - -“Who?” asked Nelson sleepily. - -“Our hobo friend.” - -Sure enough, the corner was empty. Nelson felt quickly for the money, -found it intact, and glanced about. - -“Well, he hasn’t taken anything.” - -“He kept his word, poor chap,” said Dan. - -“He did take one thing, though,” said Bob dryly, kicking over the -rubbish at the end of the room. - -“What?” they demanded anxiously. - -“The bottle.” - -They left the hut as soon as the packs were tied up, and retraced their -steps to the railroad track. On every hand were signs of the storm’s -ravages. The sides of the old gravel pit were rutted deeply, and layers -of sand and pebbles overlay the turf. Even the track had suffered in -places, and a quarter of a mile toward Beach Neck they came across a -section gang patching up a washout. By half-past seven they were seated -at a table in the dining room of the little hotel eating like wood -choppers. Through the windows beside them Great Peconic Bay glistened -in the morning sunlight. - -“There’s one good thing about missing your supper,” said Tom, his mouth -full of oatmeal, “and that is that it gives you a dandy appetite for -breakfast.” - -They did sixteen miles that day over fairly good roads and through an -interesting country. It was a fresh, brisk day with just enough warmth -in the sunshine. They skirted picturesque inlets, and crossed bridges -over tiny coves in which fishing boats and other craft lay hauled up -amid the beach grass. In the late afternoon they reached Sag Harbor, -found a hotel, visited the post office, got their mail, and ate a -hearty supper. Bedtime arrived early that evening, for none of them had -rested very much the night before, and they were pretty sleepy. Bob -managed to write a letter, but the others begged off until morning. - -A good ten hours of sleep left them feeling “fine and dandy,” to quote -Dan, and after breakfast and letter writing had been attended to they -set out to see the town. They found plenty to interest them, and if -this were an instructive narrative I should tell you some of the -things they saw. But as it isn’t, I’m going to leave them alone until -dinner time. - -After that meal had been disposed of with hearty good will, they packed -their knapsacks again, and set about crossing to the north shore. Tom -was for stopping at Shelter Island, but it was already the sixteenth of -the month, and it behooved them to turn their faces homeward if they -were to report at their schools on time. They learned that the regular -ferry would take them to Greenport or Orient, but those places were too -far east. So they studied the situation with the aid of a map in the -office of the hotel. - -“What we want to do,” said Bob, “is to get to Southold or Peconic. That -will save us six or eight miles over Greenport.” - -“Well,” suggested Dan, “we’ve got plenty of money now, so let’s get -some one to sail us over. Or what’s the matter with sailing straight -down the bay all the way to this place here; what’s the name of it? -Jamesport?” - -“It would take all night,” answered Bob. “It must be a good sixteen -miles, and with this breeze----” - -“Don’t you worry about the breeze,” said Nelson. “There’s going to be -more of it pretty soon. But, considering the fact that we’re supposed -to be on a walking trip, Dan, sailing sixteen miles of the way sounds a -bit funny.” - -“What was the place you said, Bob?” Tom asked. - -“I said Southold or Peconic, Peconic for choice because it’s farther -west. If we’re going to get back to New York on the twentieth as we -agreed, we’ve got to cover ground during the next few days, and every -mile counts. You see we’ve lost three days since we started. We want -to stop back at Barrington to see Jerry, and I think we’d ought to get -there about Tuesday noon. Then Wednesday morning we can go on to Cold -Spring, or wherever that steamboat line starts from, and take the boat -to New York.” - -“Sounds good to me,” said Dan. “Let’s ask Whiskers, the clerk, about a -sailboat.” - -The gentleman so disrespectfully alluded to by Dan had rather hazy -ideas on the subject of boat hiring, but finally advised them to “take -the straight road down to the Point and ask about.” - -Maybe they got off the straight road; at any rate they never found -“the Point.” Instead they came out on the side of a little cove where -a ramshackle boathouse, a thirty-foot sloop at anchor, and a few boats -hauled up on the beach were the principal objects in sight. But as they -drew nearer there came a sound of hammering from the shanty, and when -they reached the door they found it inhabited by a man and a boy. The -man looked like a fisherman, and the boy--well, the boy looked like a -ninny. But, perhaps, that was largely because from the time the Four -darkened the door until they went out he held his mouth open every -moment. - -“How do you do?” said Bob. “We want to get across to Peconic this -afternoon. There are four of us and we’ll pay a fair price. Can you -take us over?” - -The man looked up momentarily from the lobster pot he was mending and -shook his head. - -“No, I guess not,” he replied calmly. - -Bob waited, but apparently nothing more was forthcoming. - -“It would be worth two dollars to us,” he hazarded. - -“’Twould be worth three to me,” answered the man. - -“Well, call it three,” said Bob. - -“Or maybe four,” continued the other as though Bob had not spoken. Bob -glanced doubtfully at the others, who nodded. - -“We’ll pay four, although it seems a good deal.” - -“Southold, you said?” asked the fisherman. - -“No, Peconic.” - -“Oh, Peconic, eh?” He shook his head sorrowfully. “Now, that’s -different bait. You see, the wind’s sorter bad for a trip over to -Peconic.” - -“We’ll risk the wind,” answered Nelson. - -“Yes, but it’s gettin’ to look pret-ty squally, an’ I don’t b’lieve I’d -want to risk the boat.” - -There was a whispered consultation, and finally Bob said: “Now, look -here, we’ve got to get across, and you might as well take us as anyone -else. We’ll pay you five dollars.” - -“I couldn’t go myself,” answered the man. “But my boy here can go if he -wants to. Want to take these gentlemen across, Will?” - -The boy, his mouth still open, nodded silently. - -“All right. You better hurry, ’cause there’s goin’ to be a bit of a -blow toward night. You go along with him an’ he’ll sail you across.” - -“Thank you,” answered Bob. “Shall I pay you now?” - -“Not till you gets the goods, sir,” was the answer. “When you gets to -Peconic landing you give the money to Will; an’ tell him not to lose -it; though I rather guess he will, just the same.” - -They started out, but the fisherman called them back. - -“How much were you going to give him?” he asked. - -Bob sighed despairingly. - -“Five dollars. That was the agreement.” - -“Don’t you do it. Give him three; that’s all it’s worth.” - -“Oh, I understood you to say----” - -“I said three or _maybe_ four. Well, it’s three. That suit you?” - -“Yes, indeed. Much obliged.” - -“You’re welcome. An’ say!” - -“Yes,” answered Bob, pausing again. - -“That boy o’ mine’s about the forgetfulest you ever saw. If you -capsize, just remind him to swim, will you? Like as not he wouldn’t -think of it till it was too late.” - -Bob agreed laughingly, and the fisherman turned back gravely to his -work. When they got to the little pier, Will was awaiting them in the -rowboat. They piled in and were rowed out to the sloop. Once on board, -Will showed to better advantage. He closed his mouth and looked almost -intelligent, although Nelson confided to Bob that if it came on a blow -he thought the best thing to do would be to pitch Will overboard and -sail themselves. Will cast off the mooring, hoisted the mainsail with -Nelson’s assistance, and they drifted out of the cove. Once around -the point of the land, the breeze filled the sail and they moved -more briskly. Will put up the jib then, and the boys made themselves -comfortable. Dan and Nelson stretched themselves out in the lee of the -sail, and Bob and Tom remained in the little cockpit, the former trying -to engage Will in conversation. But Will was not brilliant at that, -and his replies to the other’s questions consisted invariably of “No,” -“Yes,” and “I guess so.” - -There was a fair, if somewhat fluky, breeze out of the south, and after -they had crept through the narrows between the mainland and Shelter -Island it was a matter of short tacking. The sun had gone in under the -light clouds, and Nelson cast frequent glances about them. - -“What are you looking for?” asked Dan lazily. - -“Squalls,” was the answer. “And we’ll get them before long unless I’m -mistaken.” - -“Can’t cut much ice in here, can they?” - -“I don’t know, but I should think they might kick up quite a fuss.” - -“Oh, well, we’ve got land all around us,” said Dan. - -“Yes, that’s the trouble. There isn’t room enough to turn around in -without hitting something. And as for that idiot there at the tiller, I -wouldn’t trust him to drive a canal boat.” - -“Oh, let her blow,” said Dan. “Maybe it’ll blow us down to Jamestown.” - -“If those clouds over there in the northeast mean anything,” answered -Nelson, “we’re more likely to get blown back toward Beach Neck.” - -“Well,” laughed the other, “we don’t have to pay unless he gets us to -Peconic. Think of the saving!” - -There was a long spit of sand stretching out from the mainland, and as -the boom swung over and they headed into the dying breeze the boat’s -nose pointed straight for the end of it. Nelson glanced back. Over near -the Shelter Island shore the sea was ruffled with cat’s-paws. Here, -however, the last breath of air seemed to have died out. - -“Say, you’d better bring her around to starboard,” he shouted. “That -looks mighty like a squall back there.” - -Will looked over his shoulder uneasily and shoved the helm over. At -that moment the first breath of wind from the new quarter struck them, -and the sloop heeled over until Dan had to grab at the mast to keep -from rolling off. The next instant the sheet paid out, and the sloop -righted. Then came a burst of wind that sent Dan and Nelson down to the -cockpit, and took the sloop through the water at a lively clip. They -were free of the sand spit now, and again the helm went over, and the -boat pointed for the channel between the spit and the north shore. - -“Maybe we’d better reef some,” said Will questioningly. - -“I know blamed well we had,” muttered Nelson, as he climbed out of -the cockpit and set to work. “Lend a hand, Dan!” he called. They took -two reefs in the mainsail, not without difficulty, and crawled back. -It was getting darker now, and there were ugly pale-green streaks on -the water. But with the wind almost astern and the channel dead ahead, -there was no need of present worry. The squall was not a heavy one, and -might soon blow over. If it didn’t they would have difficulty, Nelson -was certain, in getting into Peconic. Presently they were past the end -of the sand spit, and Nelson, for one, breathed easier. The boy at the -helm eased her off a little, and then swung her around into the wind. -At the same instant a terrific gust of wind struck them, the sloop fell -off, the mainsail swung out to starboard, and Nelson made a leap at the -tiller. - -“Give me that thing, you idiot!” he muttered. “Let go your jib unless -you want to have us all in the water!” - -The boy was plainly rattled and somewhat scared, but he managed to obey. - -“Now lower away on that mainsail,” continued Nelson. “I don’t know much -about this old tub, and I’m not going to take any chances. We’ll try -bare poles while this lasts!” - -The wind was roaring around them now, and the sloop was heeling over -under the force of it. Dan and Bob lent assistance, and in a trice the -mainsail was down and secured. The sloop found her keel again. “Now put -up that jib again,” said Nelson. “I guess we’d better keep her headed -right, though I’m blest if I know where she’s going!” - -“Here comes the rain!” cried Tom, and the next moment they got it. -Ponchos were hurriedly donned, and Barry, shivering and frightened, -crept under the seat. The shores were suddenly blotted from sight in -the whirling gray mists. The sloop scudded along through the leaping -waves at breathless pace. Nelson called to Will. - -“Here, you take this tiller,” he said. “You know a heap more about this -bay than I do.” - -But the boy only shook his head. - -“What?” demanded Nelson angrily. - -“I don’t know where we are,” muttered the other. - -“Well, do you think I do? You take hold here or we’ll pitch you -overboard.” - -Will crept back and took the tiller, his face white with fright. - -“Hold her where she is,” said Nelson. “Where was that land the last -time you saw it, Dan?” - -“About over there,” answered Dan, pointing. - -“That’s what I think. Starboard a little, Will! That’ll do; hold her -so! We’ll keep her into the wind as much as we can. I wonder whether -that old jib is doing us any good. Wish I knew more about sailboats. -If this was a launch, I could manage her. Keep your eyes open, you -fellows. We may strike Brooklyn or Jersey City any old moment.” - -The worst of the rain passed, but the wind held on fiercely. Now and -then, or so they thought, they caught glimpses of the land to the -southeast of them, apparently about two miles distant. - -“One thing’s certain,” said Nelson presently. “We won’t see Peconic -to-night. We must be two or three miles past that place already. Isn’t -there an island down ahead somewhere?” he asked of Will. - -“Yes, sir, Robin’s Island.” - -“How far from here, do you think?” - -“I don’t know.” - -“Well, what do you think? I didn’t suppose you knew.” - -“Maybe four or five miles.” - -“That’s good,” said Nelson. “Maybe the storm will die out before we get -to it. I’d hate to be arrested for knocking the paint off an island.” - -“Very careless of Robin to leave his old island around like this,” said -Dan, in a pathetic attempt to be merry. - -“What’s that noise?” asked Tom. - -They listened, and, - -“Them’s waves!” cried Will. “We’re runnin’ aground!” - -“Hard aport!” cried Nelson. Will obeyed, and Nelson seized the jib -sheet. Slowly, prancing and rolling, the sloop’s head came around. The -sound of surf was plainly to be heard. - -“It’s that blamed old island!” growled Dan. Nelson nodded, his eyes on -the boat. She began to draw away on her new tack, but it was slow work. -At times the surf sounded almost beside them, at times it became faint -and distant, as the wind lulled or increased. Two or three minutes -passed during which the Four, standing and peering through the rain -with straining eyes, waited the outcome. Then, suddenly, the boat’s -head swirled around, Tom and Dan were thrown into a heap against the -side of the cockpit, and the water streamed in over the washboard. -Barry yelped with terror, and Will joined him. - -[Illustration: “Suddenly the boat’s head swirled around.”] - -“She’s goin’ over!” he cried. “She’s sinkin’!” - -“Cut it out!” thundered Nelson. “Get back there! Take that tiller! What -did you leave it for?” - -“I--I forgot!” whined Will. - -“Forgot! Great Scott! I’d like to--to-- Hard over now! Port, you idiot, -port!” - -But the water was shoaling every instant and, try as he might, Nelson -could not get the boat’s head about. The sound of the pounding surf -increased, and the water about them leaped and dashed. The sloop was -blown, tossing and rolling, on through a maelstrom of angry white -waters. - -“Get that jib down, Dan!” called Nelson, and, clutching and swaying, -struggled to the bow. Down came the fluttering, whipping canvas, and, -with a heave, Nelson sent the anchor over. The sloop drifted side on -for a space, and then pointed her nose to the tempest. - -“Is it holding?” called Bob. - -“No,” answered Nelson. “I didn’t think it would. Get ready to take to -the water if you have to, fellows. We can make the beach all right. -I can see it, now and then, dead ahead there. Maybe, though, we can -manage to stick on here.” - -For a minute longer the sloop drifted on, tossed about on the leaping -waves, then there was a jar, her bow swung around, and she listed to -starboard. The waves flattened themselves against her upturned side, -and drenched the occupants. - -“She’s aground at the stern,” said Nelson quietly. “I guess we’ll have -to get out of this. And we might as well do it now as later. We can’t -get much wetter. Here, you, get up out of that and swim!” - -“I can’t!” whined Will. He was huddled in a corner of the cockpit, -white and trembling. - -“Can’t swim!” echoed Dan incredulously. “Well, if that isn’t the limit!” - -“Kick that coil of rope over here,” said Nelson, ducking from a wave -that came washing over them. Dan obeyed. Nelson passed the end around -Will, under his arms, and knotted it. “When I tell you to jump, you -jump; understand?” - -There was no answer, and Nelson waited for none. - -“I’ll race you ashore, Dan,” he cried. - -“All right! Coming, Bob? Coming, Tom?” - -“You bu-bu-bet!” answered Tom. Bob, who held Barry in his arms, nodded. - -“Think Barry can make it, Dan?” he asked. - -“I’ll take him,” said Dan. “I hate to leave my coat and shoes behind, -though.” - -“We’ll have to,” said Nelson. “Wait! I saw a cod line here somewhere, -didn’t I?” - -“Here it is,” answered Tom. - -“Good! We’ll make a bundle of the clothes, lash ’em together well, and -maybe we can get ’em ashore.” - -So they did it, stumbling and gasping under the assault of the waves -that broke against the boat and dashed across, drenching them from head -to feet. Finally all was ready. - -“Here goes,” said Nelson, climbing out of the cockpit and balancing -himself for an instant on the sloping, heaving deck. Then he leaped -far out into the water. Dan was after him in the instant. Bob threw -the bundle of clothes out, for the other end of the line was fastened -around Nelson’s waist. Then Tom followed. Bob caught a glimpse of -Barry’s wet head and frightened eyes as Dan arose to the surface and -struck out for the shore. Bob knotted about him the rope to which Will -was lashed, and turned to the boy. - -“When I call for you to jump, you jump,” he said. “You needn’t be -afraid; we’ll haul you in all right.” - -Will looked at him silently with wide, terror-stricken eyes, and -made no answer. Twenty yards away three dark objects appeared and -disappeared in the green-and-white ferment. Bob climbed to the rail and -leaped. The waves tried their best to smother him when he came up to -the surface, but he fought for breath, and the rest was not difficult. -Wind and tide set strongly toward the land, and he could not have -helped going there had he tried. It seemed scarcely a minute before he -felt the beach under him, and was tossed, gasping and struggling in a -white smother, into the arms of Dan, who had waded out toward him. He -climbed to his feet, and unknotted the rope. - -“Now, all together,” he said. “Jump!” - -The boat was an indistinct blur, some two hundred yards out, and as -they shouted they strained their eyes for sight of the fisherman’s -boy. But they couldn’t see surely, and after an instant they pulled -vigorously on the rope. It came fast. - -“He must be swimming,” said Tom. - -“Swimming!” answered Nelson in angry disgust. “The fool has untied the -line!” - - - - -CHAPTER XX - -FOLLOWS WITH A RESCUE, AND INTRODUCES FRIENDS IN NEED - - -“If he has,” said Bob quietly, “he’ll probably drown out there before -night.” - -They pulled the empty line in silently. Barry, wet and woe-begone, -huddled himself against the storm, and watched out of reach of the -waves. - -“I wonder if there’s a boat around here,” said Nelson. - -They turned and looked about them. They seemed to be on the end of the -island, for beyond them at a little distance the waves raced by a sandy -point. To their right, as they faced inland, a beach stretched away -until lost in the blur of the beating rain. In front of them was beach -grass, flattened under the wind, and beyond, on higher ground, a few -stunted cedars and underbrush. - -“We’ll have to find one,” said Nelson. “Two of us had better stay here, -and two go and hunt. Who’ll stay?” - -“I will, if you say so,” answered Tom. - -“All right, Tom and I’ll stay,” said Nelson. “You and Dan see what you -can find. Maybe there’s a path or a road up there; looks as though -there might be. You’d better put your coats on.” - -“Can’t get any wetter,” answered Dan, shivering. They untied the -bundle, which had come safely ashore, and pulled their dripping coats -on. Then, with Barry beside them, they started off, and in a minute -were out of sight. - -It was weary waiting there on the beach with the rain pelting them, and -the wind chilling them through and through. - -“If we only had a fire,” chattered Tom. - -Every now and then they faced the wind, and tried to make the boy in -the sloop hear them. But it is doubtful if he did, for their words -seemed to be blown back into their faces. Nelson looked at his watch. -The soaking had not affected it, and it proclaimed the time to be -twenty minutes past four. - -“It’ll be dark before very long,” he said, “if this storm keeps up.” - -“What time did we start?” asked Tom. - -“I didn’t notice, but I guess it was about a quarter to three.” - -A half hour passed, and another had almost gone, when a faint hail -reached them. It seemed at first to come from the sloop, and they put -their hands before their mouths and answered as loudly as they could. -Then it came again, and unmistakably from behind them. They looked, and -presently, like gray wraiths, figures appeared against the sky line. - -“They’ve got one!” cried Tom. - -Toward them came two persons and a horse drawing a dory. - -“Here’s your boat!” called Bob. “And, say, this isn’t an island at all; -it’s some old point! This gentleman lives about half a mile down the -road, and he’s going to help us.” - -The second person proved to be a big chap of twenty-eight or thirty in -yellow oilskins. - -“How are you, boys?” he said. “Where does she lie?” - -They pointed out the location of the sloop. - -“Struck on the bar,” said the man. “Well, we’ll have your friend safe -in no time. Get up there, Prince!” - -The horse moved down to the water, and was unhitched. - -“But where’s Dan?” asked Tom. - -“He had a beast of a chill, and I made him stay behind at the fire,” -answered Bob. “But he said he was coming along in a minute. We had an -awful time finding anybody. Got off the road, and pretty near wandered -back into the bay on the other side over there. This chap’s all right. -He was out harnessing that plug of his before we were through telling -him.” - -“Which of you fellows can row?” asked the stranger. - -“All of us,” answered Tom. - -“Well, I’ve only got two pairs of oars, so I guess one will be enough.” -He turned to Bob. “Want to come?” - -“Sure,” said Bob, “unless--” He looked at Nelson. - -“No, go ahead, old chap,” Nelson answered. “You did the hard work, and -ought to have the glory. I’ll stay here and look after Tommy.” - -So Bob scrambled into the dory, and the stranger pushed off. They had -launched at a point some little distance up the beach, and presently, -when they had struggled through the breakers, they turned the boat’s -nose out to sea, and worked along toward the bar. It was wet work, but -not dangerous, for with careful management a dory will lift itself -over the worst sea that ever ran. When they approached the sloop the -stranger hailed, but there was no answer. - -“You don’t suppose he jumped and lost the rope, do you?” he shouted to -Bob. - -“Don’t believe so,” was the reply. “He’s probably too scared to answer.” - -They worked the dory around to the lee of the sloop, and found that -Bob’s theory was the correct one. Will lay in the cockpit, very scared -and very, very seasick. He opened his eyes when they called to him, -but evidently he was incapable of making any further effort. The -stranger dropped his oars, waited his chance, and then leaped to the -slippery deck. Bob held the dory as near as he could. The stranger -picked up the boy and shoved the limp body over the side. - -“Bring her up till she bumps,” he said. - -Bob obeyed, and Will slid into the dory to lie supinely against the -seat with the water washing about his legs. The owner of the dory -tumbled in after him, saved himself from going out the other side, and -seized his oars. - -“All right!” he cried. “Push her off! We’ll go back the way we came. -I’m afraid we might get carried by the point if we tried it here.” - -By the time they were in the breakers again Dan had joined Tom and -Nelson, and all three waded out, and dragged the boat up. Will was -lifted out and borne up the beach. - -“We’ll have to carry him, I guess,” said Dan. - -“Put him right back in the dory when we get it on the road,” said the -stranger. “It’ll be rough, but he’s had it rougher already and won’t -mind, I guess.” - -So, presently, with Will lying at full length in the bottom of the -dory, and the others trudging beside, the procession started inland. -Fifteen minutes of battle against the elements brought them to a neat -and cosy little red cottage standing in a grove of cedars a short -distance from the beach. Lights gleamed from the windows, and Tom and -Nelson cheered feebly. - -There was a roaring fire in the open fireplace of the little living -room into which they were ushered, and the mellow glow of a big lamp -added to the comfort of the scene. Nelson backed up to the flames, -stretched himself, and grinned like the Cheshire cat. - -“This is simply great!” he said with a sigh. - -The host brought a little bright-faced woman and introduced her as -Mrs. Cozzens, and Bob introduced Nelson and Dan and Tom with ludicrous -formality considering the fact that they were all dripping wet. - -“You’ll want to get your things off and dry yourselves,” said Mrs. -Cozzens. “So you go right upstairs to the guest room, and Mr. Cozzens -will look after you.” - -Will, who had been propped up in a big armchair before the fire, began -to show signs of returning animation. He lifted his head and looked -about the room. - -“Hello,” said Nelson. “Feeling better?” - -“I guess so,” was the faint answer. - -“He’d better go right to bed,” said the woman. “You carry him up, John.” - -Nelson assisted, and Will was put to bed. Their host returned presently -with something hot in a cup and made Will sip it. After that, in spite -of the fact the others were changing their wet garments for all the -clothes, old and new, that Mr. Cozzens could find and making a lot of -noise about it, Will went sound asleep on his cot. When the Four were -finally ready to return to the living room they were a strange-looking -quartette. Mr. Cozzens’s garments were much too large for even Bob, and -sleeves and legs had to be turned up generously. Tom was a striking -figure in a pair of old white tennis trousers and a red sweater, while -Bob in a brown canvas shooting jacket, Dan in a pair of duck trousers -and a Tuxedo coat, and Nelson in a suit of blue serge that could have -gone around him twice were not far behind in point of picturesqueness. -They went downstairs laughing merrily to find Mr. Cozzens with a tray -containing cups of steaming coffee in his hands. - -“I was just going to take this up to you, boys. Here, sit down by the -fire and put this down. It’ll do you good. There’s cream in it, and the -sugar’s in the bowl. Hello! No spoons? Jennie, what did you think they -were going to stir with? Their fingers?” - -Mrs. Cozzens hurried laughingly in with the teaspoons, and the boys -made short work of the coffee. - -“Supper’ll be ready in a little while,” said their host. “Did you -spread your things out around the stove upstairs?” - -“Yes, sir. They’ll be dry before very long, I guess,” Dan answered. - -“I think we’d ought to get on,” said Bob half-heartedly. - -“Get on? Not while this storm lasts,” replied Mr. Cozzens. “Why, you’d -like as not walk into the bay! It’s as black as pitch outdoors. And -that reminds me I ought to be out in the stable this minute.” - -“Let me help, sir?” said Nelson, jumping up. Mr. Cozzens pressed him -gently but firmly back into his chair. - -“You sit right there, my boy, until supper’s ready. After supper we’ll -talk about your going on. Meanwhile you’ll find books and papers around -if you look, and if you smoke----?” - -“No, sir,” answered Bob. “We’ll do finely, sir.” - -“Don’t smoke, eh? Well, you’re sensible. Do without it as long as you -can. When you can’t, smoke a pipe and leave cigarettes alone. That’s my -advice, and ’tain’t so many years since I was a boy myself.” - -He went out, and the Four, left to their own devices, talked until -the crackling wood fire made its influence felt and lulled them to -drowsy silence. Barry, stretched as near the flames as safety allowed, -actually snored. And then, just when they were on the point of falling -asleep, Mr. Cozzens returned with a cheerful slamming of doors and -stamping of feet, and looked in on them on his way upstairs. - -“All right, eh?” he asked. “Supper’s almost ready.” - -Nelson smiled half-sleepily, watched the door close, and then picked a -book at random from the table beside him. It didn’t promise to be very -interesting, for it was a volume on Montaigne, and Nelson had small -affection for that gentleman. As he returned the book to its place an -inscription on the fly leaf met his eyes. - -“H. Dana Cozzens, St. Alfred’s School,” he read. - -Then their host, since he was a bit too old to be a student, must be an -instructor. Nelson wondered where St. Alfred’s was, doubtful of ever -having heard of it before. His conjectures were interrupted by the -summons to supper. - -The meal was a simple one, but everything was nicely cooked, and there -was plenty of it. The Four ate until Bob, as spokesman, felt driven to -apologies. - -“We don’t always eat like this, Mrs. Cozzens,” he assured the hostess. -“At least, none of us except Tom. I haven’t any excuse to offer for -him; he’s beyond them.” - -They told their afternoon’s adventure, and asked what Mr. Cozzens -thought about the sloop. - -“Well, it’s moderated a whole lot,” was the answer, “and if she hasn’t -broken up any by this time, she won’t. She’ll probably have some of her -planks sprung, but I don’t think she’ll be much worse for her accident. -Now, you boys had better stay right here until morning. There’s no -occasion to turn out in this storm and get all soaked up again. We -can put you up without any trouble if you don’t mind being a little -crowded.” - -They didn’t mind it at all, only---- - -“Call it settled then,” interrupted Mr. Cozzens. “We’ve got plenty of -cots even if our space is limited. We don’t often entertain a whole -ship’s crew, you see. In fact, we’re pretty well out of the way out -here on the point, and our friends, all except a few, leave us alone. -That’s one reason I built here,” laughed the host. “When summer comes -I want a real vacation, and that to me means rest and ease and old -clothes.” - -“I should think it would be fine here,” said Bob. - -“It is; I’m sorry you haven’t seen it in good weather. The next time -you’re over this way you must come and see us. Any time from the first -of July to the twentieth of September you’ll find us at home. Well, -shall we adjourn to the other room and let the lady of the house clear -the table?” - -Back in the living room Mr. Cozzens picked a pipe from a tray, and -began filling it from a big jar of tobacco. - -“It was something of an accident that you boys found me at home -to-day,” he said thoughtfully. “I’m glad you did, for there isn’t -another cottage for nearly a mile. I was going up to New York this -morning on business, but when I reached the village I found so much -mail to be answered that I postponed the trip.” He paused and smiled. -“I was going to look for a boy, and now Fate has presented me with -five.” - -“How’d I do, sir?” asked Tom promptly. - -“I’m afraid you wouldn’t like the job,” laughed Mr. Cozzens. “I’d like -to have you, but----” - -“Take me, Mr. Cozzens,” interrupted Dan. “I don’t know what the work -is, but I’ll bet I can do it.” - -“All right,” answered their host with a twinkle in his eye. “The wages -are one dollar a week, and you get your board. In return for that -munificent salary I expect you to get up at six-thirty, attend to the -furnace, look after the horse, run errands, shovel snow, wash windows -now and then, and, in short, make yourself as useful as you know how. -Appeal to you, does it?” - -“Well, I never washed a window yet,” answered Dan, “but I guess I could -do it. Anyhow, I wouldn’t have to go back to school.” - -“Eh? But you’d be at school,” replied Mr. Cozzens. - -“How is that, sir?” - -“That’s where I want the boy; at my school in Oak Park, St. Alfred’s.” - -“Oh!” said Dan blankly, amid the laughter of the others. “That would be -out of the frying pan into the fire, I guess.” - -“Out of St. Eustace into St. Alfred’s,” supplemented Bob. - -“Do you go to St. Eustace?” asked Mr. Cozzens. - -“Yes, sir.” - -“And the rest of you?” - -“No, the others don’t amount to much, sir. Nelson and Tom go to -Hillton, and Bob there is in the high school at Portland.” - -“I see. I have an instructor with me who graduated from Hillton; Mr. -Hopkinson; ever hear of him? He was a good deal before your time, -though, I guess.” - -“Where is Oak Park, sir?” asked Tom. - -“It’s near the north shore about midway between Hempstead and Cold -Spring Harbor. A very attractive place, Oak Park.” - -“And you’re the Principal, sir?” - -“Yes, or Head Master, as we call it. The school isn’t a large one. We -had thirty-two boys last year. But it’s been in existence only four -years.” - -“And--and the boy you hire, sir?” continued Tom with rising excitement, -“cu-cu-cu-could he do any studying?” - -“Why, yes, I should want him to. Are you thinking of applying?” asked -Mr. Cozzens with a smile. - -“No, sir, bu-bu-bu-but I--I--” He stopped and looked at Nelson and Bob -and Dan, who, suddenly guessing what Tom was thinking of, all tried to -speak at once. - -“Jerry!” cried Dan. - -“Just the thing!” cried Nelson. - -“We know the very fellow you want, sir!” added Bob. - -“Well, this is interesting,” said Mr. Cozzens. “Who is he?” - -“You tell him, Bob,” said Nelson. “Tom’s excited, and it would take him -all night.” - -So Bob told about their meeting with Jerry Hinkley in the barn near -Bakerville, of their plans for his education, and of their subsequent -encounter at the circus. It was rather a long story, and Mr. Cozzens -frequently interrupted the narration with his questions, but when it -was finished their host was clearly impressed. - -“If you can get hold of that boy,” he said, “you do it. Send him right -to me at Oak Park. I shall be there in three days. I can’t make any -promises, but if he turns out what I expect from your description he -will suit me nicely. And if he’s really eager to learn, and has an -ordinary amount of pluck, he ought to be able to do very well at St. -Alfred’s. He will be pretty busy, for there’s plenty to do, but he -will have time to attend all classes, and to study some outside. In -fact, it ought to be the very place for him. He’s sixteen, you say, but -backward? He’d probably have to start with the younger boys, but if he -showed willingness I’d do all I could to put him along. Whether at the -end of the year he would be able to pass the examinations for Hillton, -I can’t say. It will depend a great deal on himself. But I should think -that, with some help during the summer, as you had planned, he ought -to be able to pass. You will see him, you say, at Barrington?” - -“Yes, sir; at least, we hope to,” answered Bob. “He said when we left -him that he expected to be there about the twentieth. I hope we will -find him! When does your school begin, sir?” - -“On the twenty-third, but I should like to have him there as soon after -the twentieth as possible. Supposing you let me hear from you after you -get to Barrington? Let me know whether to expect him, for if you don’t -run across him I’ll have to look for some one else.” - -“All right, sir, we’ll telegraph you at Oak Park as soon as we get to -Barrington. I hope he’ll suit, sir, for Jerry is a fine chap, and we -all want him to get on. You see, we--we’ve adopted him in a sort of -way, sir!” - -“I see you have,” laughed Mr. Cozzens. “And very good of you it is,” he -added seriously. “I hope your plans for him will turn out splendidly, -and if he comes to me you may trust me to do all I can for him.” - -“Yes, sir, we do,” answered Tom earnestly. - -“Well, I guess I’d better go up and have a look at the invalid,” said -Mr. Cozzens. “Don’t hurry off,” he added as the others rose. “It isn’t -late; sit up just as long as you want to.” - -“I guess we’re all about ready for bed,” said Bob. “I know I am.” - -So they followed their host upstairs. Will was sleeping as soundly as -though he had not been at it four hours already. Mr. Cozzens said good -night, and the Four prepared for bed. But, in spite of their proclaimed -sleepiness, they were too highly elated and excited over Jerry’s -prospects to drop off immediately, and it was all of an hour later when -they finished discussing them. Tom had a way of getting in the last -word, and to-night was no exception. - -“Isn’t it funny how things happen?” said Nelson. “Who’d have thought -when we got shipwrecked out there on the point that it was going to -turn out like this?” - -“That’s so,” Dan replied sleepily. “Talk about luck!” - -There was silence for a minute. Then Tom’s voice came solemnly across -the dark from his cot in the comer. - -“It isn’t altogether luck,” he said. “I guess God had a good deal to do -with it.” - - - - -CHAPTER XXI - -WHEREIN TOM LOSES HIS TOOTHBRUSH AND DAN TELLS A STORY - - -The next day, which was Saturday, the seventeenth, dawned clear and -cold. It was the first touch of real autumn weather they had had, -and when they hurried downstairs the fire in the living room, which -had been freshly built, felt very good. Will came down with them. He -declared himself “all right,” but he was so uncommunicative and so ill -at ease that it was difficult to find out much about him. Mr. Cozzens -tried his best to draw him out at breakfast, but his embarrassment was -so painful that it seemed kindness to let him alone. After breakfast -they went out to the point to look after the sloop, taking the dory -with them. The wind was in the north, and bit fingers and noses as it -swept across the blue, white-capped bay. They found the sloop where -they had left her. The tide was high, and a good sea was still running, -but things looked vastly different from what they had the afternoon -before. This morning it was hard to believe that there were such things -as storms. - -Mr. Cozzens and Nelson set out in the dory. They found the sloop -two-thirds full of water, and set about pumping her out. Will had told -them that they would find a pump in the locker, and they soon had it at -work. After they had the water pretty well out they found that several -of the planks had sprung, and Mr. Cozzens advised hauling her out on -the beach and having her repaired. So they pulled the anchor in, and -Nelson rowed back to the beach for Dan and Bob. The latter and Mr. -Cozzens took a line from the sloop’s bow and fixed it to the stern of -the dory. Then they got into the latter, and tried to pull the sloop -off the sand bar, while Dan and Nelson stood in the stern in order to -raise the forward part. It was hard work, but at the end of twenty -minutes the sloop was afloat again, and half an hour later she was -lying on her side well out of water, thanks to the efforts of Prince -and all hands. There they left her, after securing her with a couple -of cables, and it was decided that Will should return home by train to -Greenport and ferry to Sag Harbor. They paid him five dollars, since, -as Dan pointed out, they had really benefited by the misadventure, and -Will, with muttered thanks and farewell, disappeared in the direction -of the station. - -A little while later the Four, too, took their departure, thanking Mr. -and Mrs. Cozzens heartily for their kindness, and promising to come -again to the red cottage if ever they had the opportunity. Mr. Cozzens -walked with them as far as the neck, and pointed out their road to them. - -“Good-by, boys,” he said. “I’m glad I had the pleasure of meeting you, -and I hope it won’t be the last time. Come and see my school some time. -Meanwhile, let me hear from you about your friend as soon as you can. -Good-by and good luck!” - -The nip in the air was conducive to brisk traveling, and when, at noon, -they reached Jamesport they had eight miles to their credit. In the -afternoon they did still better, and reached Fairhaven, twelve miles -distant, tired and hungry and happy, at half-past six. They found -letters awaiting them at the post office in the morning. Mr. Speede -wrote that, since Dan was really in earnest, he would be glad to do -anything in reason for Jerry, “even to the extent,” he wrote, “of -becoming custodian and administrator of the FUND!” Tom’s father and -Nelson’s also professed themselves eager to help, and Jerry’s life for -the next two or three years seemed to be nicely arranged. If only they -could find Jerry! - -The day was Sunday and, although warmer than yesterday, was still -pretty cold. In spite of the fact that by waiting for the post office -to open they had delayed their departure until after nine o’clock, they -had resolved to make the day’s journey a record one. - -“We haven’t done a real day’s work yet,” declared Bob. “We’ve just been -loafing along. If we can make Kingston to-night that’ll leave us only -about half a day’s tramp to Barrington, and we can get there to-morrow -noon. Then we can find Jerry, spend the night there, and go to the -steamer landing Tuesday morning.” - -“How far is Kingston from here?” asked Dan. - -“Not over twenty miles.” - -“We can do it, then.” - -“Of course we can,” agreed Nelson. “We’re in good shape now.” - -“Yes,” answered Dan. “Even Tommy’s shape is better, I think. I’ll bet -he’s walked off ten pounds.” - -“No, I don’t believe so, Dan,” said Bob. “You see, as soon as Tommy -loses any flesh, he gets busy at the table, and puts it right back.” - -“Well, come ahead,” said Dan. “Let’s get at it. Where’s that dog got -to? You Barry! Where are you, you rascal? Oh, found another bone, have -you? My, you’re getting more and more like Tommy every day; eating all -the time!” - -“Hope you choke,” said Tom in a good-natured growl. - -That day’s march was barren of incidents worthy of mention, unless -the incident of Tom’s knapsack is worth speaking about. It was after -dinner, and they had done some fourteen of the possible twenty miles -when there was a cry of disgust from Tom. - -“What’s the matter?” asked Dan, turning. - -“Mu-mu-mu-matter!” answered Tom. “Mu-mu-matter enough! Lu-lu-lu-look at -mu-mu-my knapsack!” - -“What have you done to it?” asked Nelson in amazement. “It--it’s empty!” - -“No wonder,” said Bob with a smile; “it’s all untied.” - -“That’s no way to fix a knapsack,” said Dan soberly. “What have you -done with your things?” - -“Du-du-du-done with them!” sputtered Tom. “Wh-wh-wh-what do you -su-su-suppose I’ve du-du-du-done with them? Eaten th-th-th-them?” - -“Well, we know your appetite, Tommy,” said Nelson gently. - -“Th-th-they’re su-su-scattered fu-fu-from here to the hotel! -Wh-wh-wh-what’ll I du-du-do?” - -By this time the others were laughing at the tops of their lungs, and -it was several moments before any suggestions came. Tom stared from one -to another of them in mingled reproach and indignation. Finally, - -“Sit down and wait for them to catch up with you,” Dan suggested. - -“Send Barry back for them,” said Bob. - -“Whistle,” said Nelson. - -But presently they agreed that it was hard luck, and finally calmed -Tom’s despair. - -“I’ll go back with you a ways,” Nelson volunteered, “and the others can -go on if they want to.” - -“We’ll wait awhile,” said Bob, “and then if you don’t show up we’ll -walk ahead slowly, and give you a chance to catch up with us.” - -Luckily they found most of the missing articles within a mile and a -half. Tom’s toothbrush and a pair of stockings, however, were not to be -seen. - -“Let ’em go,” said Tom. “I’ll get a brush at Kingston or Barrington; -and it doesn’t matter about the socks because I’ve got plenty more in -my trunk. Help me tie this old thing up right, will you?” - -The knapsack rearranged, they started back. - -They caught up with Bob and Dan two or three miles outside of Kingston, -and reached that town just at dusk. Nelson and Tom were inclined to -be stuck-up over the fact that they had done three miles more than -the others and therefore held the record. But Dan maintained that it -didn’t count when you went over the same ground twice. Of course they -went to the hotel in which they had put up on the occasion of their -previous visit and where Barry had distinguished himself, and of course -they received a warm welcome. Barry was in real danger of death from -overeating, so attentive was the proprietor. After dinner they told the -latter of their further adventures with the thief, and it was plain to -be seen that he didn’t approve of their clemency, although he didn’t -say so. When bedtime came Dan and Nelson went into the room occupied by -Bob and Tom, and stretched themselves out on the bed while the others -undressed. After Bob had brushed his teeth he carried his toothbrush -over to the bed in a stealthy manner, and placed it under his pillow. - -“What the dickens is that for?” asked Dan. - -“S-sh!” whispered Bob, finger on lips. “You know Tommy lost his.” - -“Huh!” answered Tom amid the laughter. “You needn’t think I’d use -yours!” - -“That reminds me,” said Dan, with a giggle. “Did you ever hear about -the Englishmen on the steamer?” - -“Help!” cried Nelson. “Help! Dan’s going to tell a joke.” - -“Never mind,” said Bob soothingly; “humor him; laugh if you possibly -can.” - -“All right; you say when, Bob.” - -“Shut up,” said Dan, “and let me tell you. It’s funny. I read it -in--in--_Punch_, I think it was.” - -“_Punch!_” howled Nelson. “Good night, you fellows; I really must be -going.” - -But Dan pulled him back to the bed. - -“You stay here,” he said. “This joke’s all right if it did come from -_Punch_.” - -“Let him tell it and get it over with,” advised Tom, between splashes -at the washstand. - -“Well, there was an Englishman,” began Dan. “No, there were two -Englishmen.” - -“Make it three, old man,” advised Nelson. “There’s luck in odd numbers.” - -“Shut up, you! They were on a steamer, and had the same stateroom.” - -“Which had the lower berth?” inquired Tom. - -“And they were strangers to each other,” continued the narrator. “Well, -one of the Englishmen went down----” - -“Which one was it?” asked Bob. - -“Went down to his cabin and found the other chap----” - -“I know!” cried Tom. - -“Well, what is it?” asked Dan indignantly. - -“He went down and found the other chap had stolen the berths!” - -“Oh, you go to thunder! He found the other chap using his toothbrush.” - -“Now!” cried Bob, and he and Nelson proceeded to go into spasms of -laughter. - -“Best thing _Punch_ ever printed!” gurgled Bob. - -“Frightfully funny!” moaned Nelson. “Oh! Oh! I shall die!” - -“Imagine--imagine how the--toothbrush felt, Nel!” shrieked Bob. - -“Say, will you shut up?” said Dan, pummeling Nelson. “That isn’t all of -it. Wait till I tell you. The first Englishman----” - -Loud groans interrupted him. - -“It isn’t all, Bob,” said Nelson sorrowfully. Bob shook his head. - -“Bear up, Nel! Who knows? Maybe he’s forgotten the rest.” - -“I know!” interrupted Tom again. - -“Know what?” asked Dan. - -“The rest of it. The toothbrush was loaded!” - -“Loaded, you idiot! How do you mean?” - -“Had--had powder in it and----” - -“Oh, you fellows make me tired,” said Dan good-naturedly, rolling off -the bed. “Come on, Nel.” - -Nelson allowed himself to be pulled to the floor, and then found his -feet. - -“All right, Dan,” he said. “Let’s go. They have no sense of humor here. -They’re a stupid lot, anyway. Barry’s the only one who has any sense.” - -“Hold on!” cried Tom, as the door was closing. “I want to know which of -the two had the lower berth.” - -“Find out,” replied Dan disgustedly. - -Later, when the lights were out, and Dan and Nelson had composed -themselves for slumber, the latter broke the silence. - -“Say, Dan!” - -“Yep.” - -“What was the rest of that story?” - -“Will you shut up and let me tell it?” asked Dan suspiciously. - -“Honor bright! Go ahead!” - -“Well, you see, the first Englishman came down and found the other -Englishman using his toothbrush, and----” - -“Meaning the toothbrush belonging to the first Englishman?” - -“No--yes!” answered Dan. “Of course the first Englishman’s toothbrush, -you idiot. I said that, didn’t I?” - -There was no answer, and he went on. - -“‘I say, my dear fellow,’ said the first Englishman, ‘that’s my -toothbrush you have there!’ ‘Really?’ said the second Englishman. ‘I -beg your pawdon, old chap! I thought it belonged to the ship’!” - -Dan chuckled in the darkness, and waited for Nelson’s laughter. - -“I think that’s pretty good, don’t you?” he asked presently. - -There was no answer. Nelson was snoring placidly. Dan rolled over and -thumped his pillow. - -“Idiot!” he muttered. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII - -WHEREIN GOOD-BYS ARE SAID, AND BARRY MAKES HIS CHOICE - - -“Well, we’re pretty near home,” said Bob at the breakfast table the -next morning. “To-morrow afternoon we ought to be in New York.” - -“Then it’s back to school!” sighed Tom. - -“I’m ready,” said Nelson. “School’s all right, Tommy. I’m going to have -a good time this year. A fellow always does his last year.” - -“Wish it was my last,” said Tom. “You fellows’ll be sophomores at -Erskine when I get there, and I’ll be a freshie and you won’t have -anything to do with me!” - -“Oh, if you behave yourself, Tommy, we’ll speak to you now and then as -we pass,” said Dan. “We’re not the kind to go back on an old friend.” - -“You could make up a year if you tried,” said Nelson. “If you had some -coaching next summer you could pass the college exams all right.” - -“He and Jerry might be coached together,” suggested Bob. - -“Well, I’m going to try,” answered Tom forlornly, “but I don’t believe -I’ll be able to make it. If it wasn’t for Latin----” - -He shook his head dejectedly. - -“Cheer up, Tommy,” said Dan. “_In hoc signo vinces_, old chap! Never -forget that. That means ‘While there’s life there’s hope.’” - -“And _E pluribus unum_ means one out of many,” rejoined Tom sadly. “And -the one’s me.” - -When they had stopped laughing, Bob said: - -“I think we’ve had a pretty good time this trip, taking it all in all, -don’t you?” - -“Dandy,” answered Nelson. “We always do when we get together. Look at -the fun we had last summer at Chicora! I think we ought to do something -else together next summer. What do you say?” - -He looked eagerly around at the others. - -“Sure!” cried Dan. “Let’s get together, the four of us, every summer -until--until we don’t want to!” - -“Good scheme,” said Bob. “Let’s decide on something for next year.” - -“That’s not so easy,” answered Nelson. “But we can think it over and -write to each other in the spring, and--” - -“What I’d like to do,” interrupted Dan, “would be to go on a cruise -somewhere.” - -“Sail, do you mean?” asked Tom anxiously. - -“Sail or row or paddle or any old way,” answered Dan. “Pass me the -toast, Nel, if you don’t want it all.” - -“Catch,” answered Nelson. “Look here, how would a cruise in a launch -do?” - -“Swell!” said Tom. - -“Just the ticket!” agreed Dan. - -“Well, I think I could get our launch; I guess dad would let us have it -for a month or so; and we could have a bully time.” - -“That would be all right,” said Bob. “Or if we couldn’t do that we -might get some horses, and take a riding trip. I knew a fellow who----” - -“That’s too much like walking,” interrupted Dan. “What’s the matter -with an automobile?” - -“Where are you going to get it?” asked Bob sarcastically. - -“Oh, borrow it. Tom’s father has a machine, hasn’t he, Tom?” - -“Yes, but he isn’t fool enough to lend it to us!” - -“That’s because he doesn’t know us,” answered Dan, unruffled. “I can -run an auto to beat the band.” - -“Not with me inside, you can’t,” said Nelson decidedly. - -“Well, we’ll think it all over,” said Bob. “There’s lots of time. What -we’ve got to do now is to hit the trail for Barrington and Mr. Jerry -Hinkley. Aren’t you most through, Tommy?” - -Tommy declared, with his mouth full, that he was quite through, and a -few minutes later they were once more on their way, with the journey’s -end well in sight. - -“It’s certainly done you good, Dan,” said Nelson presently, as they -were crossing the river. “I guess that doctor of yours knew what he was -talking about. I’ll bet you’ve put on ten or fifteen pounds since we -started.” - -“I guess I have gained a bit,” answered Dan. “Anyhow, I surely feel -fine and dandy. But I’m sorry it is all over; I’d like to turn around -and do it all over again, wouldn’t you?” - -“Yes, if it wasn’t for school,” replied Nelson. “Say, I’ll see you at -the football game, won’t I? And you promised to come up over Sunday -some time.” - -“I’m going to. Only I mustn’t let the fellows know it or they’ll throw -me out. Personally, Nel, I can stand the disgrace, but----” - -“Oh, dry up! We’re going to beat you at football this fall. Hillton’s -going to have the finest team that ever----” - -“Was beaten by St. Eustace,” laughed Dan. - -Whereupon the argument waxed warm, and for a mile or more they talked -football with all the enthusiasm customary when two live, manly, -American boys get together in the autumn weather. - -They had covered about half the distance to Barrington when the rattle -and rumble of a heavy farm wagon coming along behind warned them to the -side of the road. As they got out of the way Nelson glanced carelessly -around. Then he gave a shout that attracted the attention of Bob and -Tom, who were some fifty yards ahead, and brought them scurrying back. -The farm wagon came to a halt, and in the next instant Nelson and Dan -were clambering up and shaking hands with Jerry Hinkley. - -Jerry was back in his farm clothes, but for all of that he presented -a different appearance to-day than on the occasion of their first -meeting. Perhaps his clothes were a little neater and cleaner; surely -his hair no longer looked like an overgrown mop, but was well cut and -smoothly brushed. There was no doubt that Jerry was a very good-looking -boy. But I think the principal change lay in his expression. To-day he -looked smilingly confident, self-assured, as though knowledge of his -capabilities had found him at last, and he was eager to prove them. -Much of his former diffidence, however, remained, and he shook hands -with the Four, and answered their delighted greetings with smiling -embarrassment. Then they were all climbing into the wagon, Jerry’s way -being theirs. - -“Say, just look at Barry, will you,” said Bob. “He’s making friends -with the horses.” - -And sure enough the terrier was leaping at the noses of the two -big sorrels and whining delightedly. And the horses evidently -reciprocating the sudden affection, were bobbing their heads down to -him as he leaped about. Dan called to him and lifted him into the -wagon, where he scurried industriously about, sniffing and sneezing and -pawing at the litter of dusty straw and chaff. - -“Where are you going?” asked Jerry as he chirped to the horses. - -“We were going to see you,” answered Nelson. “Isn’t it odd we should -have found you like this? Where have you been?” - -“Just down the road a piece. I was delivering a load of grain for Mr. -Osgood.” - -“Does he live near here?” asked Tom. - -“About a mile beyond,” answered Jerry. “I’d like for you to stop and -see him. I--I been telling him about you.” - -“Of course we’ll stop,” said Nelson. “Besides--” He paused and looked -inquiringly at the others. They nodded. - -“Go ahead,” said Bob. - -“Fire away,” added Dan. - -“Besides,” Nelson resumed, “we’ve got something to tell you. I guess we -might as well tell it now.” - -So, clinging to the seat to keep from being shaken off, he told Jerry -of the arrangements they had made for his future, and finally of Mr. -Cozzens’s offer of a situation at St. Alfred’s. And when it was all -over, and Tom and Bob and Dan had each added eager and unnecessary -explanations, Jerry still sat silent, his eyes fixed on the ears of the -off horse. They waited a moment. Then, - -“Look here, Jerry, it’s all right, isn’t it?” asked Dan anxiously. -Jerry nodded. - -“Good,” breathed Dan relievedly. “I was afraid you--er----” - -“I ain’t said nothing--I mean anything--because I don’t know what _to_ -say,” Jerry finally remarked, with a quick, embarrassed glance at -Nelson. “I--I----” - -He faltered and stopped. - -“Don’t say a word,” returned Nelson. “It’s all right.” - -“But I want you all to know that--that I’m very much obliged. It--it’s -more than that, only I can’t just say it. I--I don’t know why you -fellows have been so good to me.” - -Bob laughed uneasily. - -“You’re such a good fellow, Jerry, we wanted to help you,” he said. “We -haven’t done anything much, though; the hardest part is left for you, -old chap. But I think you’re going to make good, Jerry; we all think -that; so don’t you disappoint us.” - -“I won’t!” answered Jerry almost savagely. “I’m going to make you -fellows glad you did it, see if I don’t!” - -Nelson clapped him on the shoulder. - -“That’s the way to talk, Jerry! And if you can get that place at St. -Alfred’s it’ll make a lot of difference. Why, you can learn any amount -there this winter, and have your board and room besides. Mr. Cozzens -said it wouldn’t be awfully easy, you know, plenty of work and all -that; but you’ll have time for lessons and study, all right.” - -“I don’t care how hard the work is,” answered Jerry. “I can do it. -Only----” - -“Only what?” asked Bob as he hesitated. - -“Only I don’t know as I ought to go. You see, I engaged with Mr. Osgood -for all winter.” - -“Oh, he will let you off,” said Nelson. “We’ll see him and tell him -just how it is. That’ll be all right, Jerry.” - -“I hope so,” said Jerry. “There’s the farm now; that’s his house, the -white one yonder.” - -Evidently Mr. Osgood was one of the progressive sort. Everything about -the place, from the busy windmill to the big white house with its wide -verandas and well-graveled walks, was scrupulously neat and clean, and -a general air of prosperity pervaded it. And when they had rattled up -the driveway to the barn, and the owner of the premises appeared before -them, they discovered him to be just such a man as his place indicated. -He was middle-aged, tall, and muscular looking, with a pair of humorous -and kindly blue eyes which sparkled brightly from his tanned face. The -boys liked him on the instant, and Nelson decided that he would not -have much difficulty in securing Jerry’s release. - -They tumbled out of the wagon, and were introduced by Jerry. Mr. Osgood -declared heartily that he was very glad to meet them, especially as he -had heard so much about them from Jerry, and was in the act of shaking -hands all around when an interruption occurred. The interruption -was in the form of Barry, who, released from the wagon, had spent a -moment in running excitedly about the ground, and now was leaping -enthusiastically upon the farmer, whining and barking joyously. Mr. -Osgood stopped and looked down. Then an expression of deep surprise -overspread his face. - -“Well, I’ll be switched!” he said slowly. “Where under the sun did you -come from, Laddie?” - -There was a moment of silence save for the terrier’s frantic -explanations. Jerry, unhitching the horses, paused and looked at Dan. -Dan’s face was a study. He was striving very hard to keep from looking -miserable. Finally, - -“Is that your dog, sir?” he asked. - -“It surely is,” answered Mr. Osgood. “He disappeared about two or three -weeks ago. May I ask where you found him?” - -So Dan, eagerly assisted by the others, recounted the tale of the -terrier’s rescue and subsequent adventures, and the farmer listened -interestedly. Then, - -“Well, that’s what I call a plucky piece of work,” he said admiringly, -“and I’m much obliged to you. I hadn’t had Laddie long, but I was -getting mighty fond of him when he disappeared. And I’m glad to get him -back.” He hesitated. “I advertised in the Barrington paper and offered -ten dollars reward, and so--if you don’t mind taking it----” - -But Dan shook his head. - -“I’d rather not, sir,” he muttered. “Barry’s made it up to me lots of -times. I--we--got quite fond of him, sir.” - -“I s’pose you did,” said the farmer thoughtfully, eying Dan. “I’m -sorry,” he added simply. - -“What’s his name, sir?” asked Tom. - -“His full name’s Forest Lad, but I call him Laddie. He used to belong -to a Mr. Hutchinson who has a place about a mile from here and raises -dogs. They say Laddie got a prize once at some show in New York, but I -don’t know for sure. He got sick in the spring, and one day when I was -over at the Hutchinson place with some grain I admired him, and Mr. -Hutchinson said I could have him if I thought I could cure him. I said -I guessed all he needed was plenty of fresh air and exercise--he was in -a run over there, with a fence around him--and so I took him. And it -did cure him too. Now, I guess Laddie got sort of homesick one day, and -started out for Hutchinson’s. The place is closed up this summer--the -family’s in Europe, I think--and it’s likely that when Laddie got -there he didn’t find anyone around. Maybe he thought he’d sort of wait -awhile. I guess that’s how you happened to run across him.” - -“I guess so,” Dan agreed. - -“I want you boys to stay to dinner,” continued the farmer. “It’ll be -ready in about half an hour. And if Jerry’s through with the team he -might show you around. Maybe you’ve never seen an up-to-date farm, eh?” - -So Mr. Osgood excused himself, and Jerry took them in charge. Barry, -for Dan was always to remember the terrier by that name, elected to -go with them, much to Dan’s delight, and acted as though he was guide -instead of Jerry. There was much to interest them, and they weren’t -nearly through when the bell rang for dinner, and they had to hurry -back to the house. They found quite a company assembled in the dining -room, for besides Mr. Osgood there was his wife and two daughters, an -elderly lady whose relationship wasn’t quite plain, Jerry, and four -other farm hands. So they made quite a tableful when all were seated. -It was a bully dinner, to quote Tom--and Tom was a bit of an authority -on such things--and they ate heartily. And presently Nelson brought up -the subject of Jerry and Mr. Cozzens’s offer, and their host listened -in silence. Nelson painted in vivid colors the advantages to accrue -to Jerry, and when he was through, the farmer ate for a minute in -silence. Finally, - -“Well, I’m sorry to lose Jerry,” he said thoughtfully, “but I’m not -going to stand in his way. I didn’t get overmuch education myself, -but I’m not fool enough to think it’s unnecessary. I guess if I’d had -more of it I might have arrived where I am to-day a good deal earlier. -So Jerry does just as he wants to in this matter. But if he takes my -advice he will go to this school you tell about. What say, Jerry?” - -Jerry maintained an embarrassed silence for a moment. Then, - -“I think I’ll go, sir, if it ain’t putting you in no hole,” he replied. -“Leastways, I’d like to see Mr. Cozzens and talk it over with him.” - -“Right you are! You’d better go over to-morrow morning. And then if you -decide to stay I’ll send your things over to you. But you must let me -know right away so’s I can get some one in your place. Help isn’t easy -to find this time of year.” - -“Thank you, sir,” answered the boy gratefully. “I’ll write to you -to-morrow afternoon if I don’t come back.” - -[As a matter of fact, Jerry didn’t come back. He stayed at St. -Alfred’s, and never regretted it for a moment. But all this has nothing -to do with the present story.] - -After dinner the boys completed their tour of inspection, and then -made ready to depart. Dan had been looking pretty downhearted, and when -the time came to take leave of Barry he didn’t feel much better. They -shook hands with Mr. Osgood, were cordially invited to come again, and -then turned to Jerry. - -“Good-by, Jerry,” said Bob. “Don’t get discouraged if the work seems -hard at first. It’s going to be a tussle, but you can do it.” - -“That’s so,” said Tom, shaking hands. “Just you bu-bu-bu-buckle down to -it, Jerry. Remember we’re bu-bu-back of you!” - -“Good-by,” said Dan. “And good luck.” - -“Good-by, Signor Danello,” answered Jerry with a shy effort at -pleasantry. “I--I’m sorry about--the dog.” - -Dan nodded and moved away. - -“I’ll write to you now and then,” said Nelson, “and tell you about -things at school--our school, Jerry--so you can keep your courage up. -And you’ll write to me, won’t you?” - -“Yes,” Jerry replied eagerly. “Only--I ain’t a very good writer, -Nelson.” - -“That’s all right; neither am I, I guess. Good-by. Good-by, Mr. Osgood! -And thanks for letting Jerry off.” - -“Good-by,” echoed the others. - -The Four turned down the walk to the gate. Barry, who during the -proceedings had been manifestly uneasy, now pricked his ears and -watched Dan’s departure with alert interest. Once he turned and looked -inquiringly at Mr. Osgood. The farmer returned his look with a smile -and a wink. Perhaps Barry understood that, like Jerry, he was free to -choose for himself. For after one indecisive moment he gave a bark and -flew down the walk as hard as he could go. He caught Dan at the gate, -and leaped ecstatically about him. Dan, his lips trembling, waved him -back and tried to tell him to go home. But the words wouldn’t come. Bob -and Nelson and Tom watched, silently sympathetic. Barry ran into the -road and turned, his tail wagging fast, as though asking, “What are you -waiting for? Aren’t we all here?” - -“Barry,” muttered Dan miserably, “I can’t take you, old chap. You -aren’t my dog any more. You--you’ll have to go home.” - -Then footsteps crunched on the gravel, and Dan turned to find Mr. -Osgood smiling kindly into his eyes. - -“I gave him his choice,” said the farmer, “and he’s made it. He’s yours -if you want him, my boy.” - -Three hours later the Four--or should I say the Five?--were standing on -the deck of the little steamer watching the Long Island shore recede -across the waters of the Sound. The boat’s nose was pointed toward New -York--and school and study and hard work. But every face there showed -happiness and contentment. For, being healthy and sensible, they -knew that study and hard work stand just as much for enjoyment as do -vacation days. And of all in the group there on the deck the happiest -was Dan, unless--well, unless, possibly, it was Barry! - - -THE END - - - - -BY RALPH HENRY BARBOUR. - - -=Forward Pass!= A Story of the “New Football.” Illustrated in Color. -Cloth, $1.50. - - -=The Spirit of the School.= The Story of a Boy Who Works His Way -through School. Illustrated in Colors. Cloth, $1.50. - - -=Four Afloat.= - -=Four Afoot.= - -=Four in Camp.= - -A Series of Books relating the Adventures of Four Boy Companions. -Illustrated in Colors, $1.50 each. - - -=On Your Mark!= A Story of College Life and Athletics. Illustrated in -Colors by C. M. RELYEA. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - -No other author has caught so truly the spirit of school and college -life. - - -=The Arrival of Jimpson.= Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - -Stories of college pranks, baseball, football, hockey, and college life. - - -=Weatherby’s Inning.= A Story of College Life and Baseball. Illustrated -in Colors by C. M. RELYEA. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - -A fascinating story of college life and sport. - - -=Behind the Line.= A Story of School and Football. Illustrated by C. M. -RELYEA. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - - -=Captain of the Crew.= Illustrated by C. M. RELYEA. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - -A fresh, graphic, delightful story that appeals to all healthy boys and -girls. - - -=For the Honor of the School.= A Story of School Life and Interscholastic -Sport. Illustrated by C. M. RELYEA. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - - -=The Half-Back.= Illustrated by B. WEST CLINEDINST. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - -“It is in every sense an out-and-out boys’ book.”--_Boston Herald._ - - -D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. - - - - -BY WILLIAM O. STODDARD. - -Each Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - - -The Boy Lincoln. - -This is an absorbing fanciful account of the early days of Abraham -Lincoln when he was a boy living on the frontier. - - -The Fight for the Valley. - -Colored Frontispiece and other Illustrations. - -A narrative of the brave defense of Fort Schuyler and the battle of -Oriskany. - - -The Spy of Yorktown. - -Colored Frontispiece. - -A story of the Yorktown campaign and Benedict Arnold. - - -With the Black Prince. - -A Story of Adventure in the Fourteenth Century. - -The absorbing interest of this stirring historical romance will appeal -to all young readers. - - -Success Against Odds; or, How an American Boy Made his Way. - -In this spirited and interesting story Mr. Stoddard tells the -adventures of a plucky boy who fought his own battles and made his way -upward from poverty in a Long Island seashore town. It is a tale of -pluck and self-reliance capitally told. - - -The Red Patriot. - -A Story of the American Revolution. - - -The Windfall; or, After the Flood. - -Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst. - - -Chris, the Model-Maker. - -A Story of New York. With 6 full-page Illustrations by B. West -Clinedinst. - - -On the Old Frontier. - -With 10 full-page Illustrations. - - -The Battle of New York. - -With 11 full-page Illustrations and colored Frontispiece. - - -Little Smoke. - -A Story of the Sioux Indians. With 12 full-page Illustrations by F. S. -Dellenbaugh, portraits of Sitting Bull, Red Cloud, and other chiefs, -and 72 head and tail pieces representing the various implements and -surroundings of Indian life. - - -Crowded Out o’ Crofield. - -With 23 Illustrations by C. T. Hill. - -The story of a country boy who fought his way to success in the great -metropolis. - - -D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. - - - - -BY GABRIELLE E. JACKSON. - - -Little Miss Cricket. - -Little Miss Cricket’s New Home. - -Illustrated. 12mo. $1.25 each. - -Two charming stories of a pathetic little heroine. - - - The Joy of Piney Hill. - -Illustrated in color by Ruth M. Hallock. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - -The story of a dear little girl who was in trouble and who was taken -into a model school where she makes every one love her. - - -Three Graces. - -Three Graces at College. - -With illustrations in tint by C. M. Relyea. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50 each. - -The first, a story of boarding school life, full of incident and -wholesome characterization. The second, a charming story of college -life, its ideals, recreations, temptations and rewards. - - -Sunlight and Shadow. - -Four full-page illustrations in colors. 12mo. Ornamental cloth, $1.50. - -“A wholesome little tale is this, tingling with life and youthful -spirits.”--_The Interior._ - - -Big Jack. - -Illustrated. 12mo. Ornamental cloth, $1.00. - -“A book which every parent would show wisdom in putting in the -libraries of his children.”--_Dayton Daily News._ - - -Little Miss Sunshine. - -Illustrated. 12mo. Ornamental cloth, $1.50. - -“A delightful, wholesome, readable book for girls.”--_Criterion._ - - -Little Comrade. - -Illustrated. 12mo. Ornamental cloth, $1.00. - -Every child should be taught the love of animals. This book teaches -that love. - - -The Colburn Prize. - -Illustrated. 12mo. Ornamental cloth, $1.00. - -Dedicated to the school-girls throughout the land. Nine full-page -illustrations add to the charm of this exquisite gift book. - - -D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. - - - - -A GREAT STORY FOR BOYS. - - -Buck Jones at Annapolis. - -By Captain RICHMOND PEARSON HOBSON, U. S. Navy. Illustrated in colors. -12mo. Ornamental cloth, $1.50. - -There is no boy in the country to whom the name of Hobson does not -bring a thrill of patriotic fire. A boy’s story by this national hero -is sure of an overwhelming reception. Captain Hobson here shows himself -a story-teller of rare powers, and his book would captivate the young -reader whatever name was on its title-page. His name adds new charm and -conviction. - -There has never before been so loyally and faithfully depicted the -routine and life of the naval cadet. Every incident in this story of -Buck’s career at the Naval Academy has its foundation in fact, and in -the author’s use of them here they become revitalized. Nowhere else -so well as in this story can the young man, desirous of learning how -a cadet fares at Annapolis, obtain the information. And in addition -to all this Captain Hobson has told a story brimful of interest and -adventure, the love and mystery of the sea, the fascination of boy life -aboard ship with other boys, and the friendships with old tars and -younger classmates. - -“Ranked among the most popular books for boys, not only because of the -fame of the gallant young author, but because it is a splendid story of -the sort that cannot be put aside until finished, even if the reading -extends far into the small morning hours.”--_Albany Times-Union._ - -“American boys who take an interest in the growth and achievements of -our splendid Navy--and that means all American boys with red blood -in their veins--have a huge treat awaiting them in ‘Buck Jones at -Annapolis.’ The book is full of snap, stirring adventure and insight -into life at Annapolis.”--_Army and Navy Journal._ - -D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. - - - - -BY HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH. - - -The Young McKinley. - -Illustrated. 12mo. Ornamental Cloth, $1.50. - -Mr. Butterworth portrays the future President at school, where, after -a bitter disappointment, the crusty old school-teacher, who has a good -heart beneath his severe exterior, says to him: “Never mind, you may be -President yet.” He traces President McKinley’s career through his army -days to the time when he was preparing for that great political career -which made the blow that struck him down at the height of his glory a -blow to the whole United States. - - -Brother Jonathan; or, The Alarm Post in the Cedars. - -A Tale of Early Connecticut. Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - - -In the Days of Audubon. - -A Tale of the “Protector of Birds.” Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst -and others. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50. - - -In the Days of Jefferson; or, The Six Golden Horseshoes. - -A Tale of Republican Simplicity. Illustrated by F. T. Merrill. $1.50. - - -The Story of Magellan. - -A Tale of the Discovery of the Philippines. Illustrated by F. T. -Merrill and others. $1.50. - - -The Treasure Ship. - -A Story of Sir William Phipps and the Inter-Charter Period in -Massachusetts. Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst and others. $1.50. - - -The Pilot of the Mayflower. - -Illustrated by H. Winthrop Peirce and others. $1.50. - - -True to His Home. - -A Tale of the Boyhood of Franklin. Illustrated by H. Winthrop Peirce. -$1.50. - - -The Wampum Belt; or, The Fairest Page of History. - -A Tale of William Penn’s Treaty with the Indians. With 6 full-page -Illustrations. $1.50. - - -The Knight of Liberty. - -A Tale of the Fortunes of Lafayette. With 6 full-page Illustrations. -$1.50. - - -The Patriot Schoolmaster. - -A Tale of the Minutemen and the Sons of Liberty. With 6 full-page -Illustrations by H. Winthrop Peirce. $1.50. - - -In the Boyhood of Lincoln. - -A Story of the Black Hawk War and the Tunker Schoolmaster. With 12 -Illustrations and colored Frontispiece. $1.50. - - -The Boys of Greenway Court. - -A Story of the Early Years of Washington. With 10 full-page -Illustrations. $1.50. - - -The Log School-House on the Columbia. - -With 13 full-page Illustrations by J. Carter Beard, E. J. Austen, and -others. $1.50. - - -D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. - - - - -STORIES FOR YOUNG READERS - - -=JOURNEYS OF THE KIT KAT CLUB.= _Illustrated. 8vo. $2.00 Net._ - -By WILLIAM R. A. WILSON. - -A beautifully illustrated volume filled with interesting and salient -features of English history, folk-lore, politics, and scenery. - - -=BUTT CHANLER, FRESHMAN.= _Illustrated. 12mo. $1.50._ - -By JAMES SHELLEY HAMILTON, Amherst ’06. - -College sports are always a subject of interest to young readers, and -here are incidents that are dear to all college associates. - -“The story is breezy, bright, and clean.”--_The Bookseller, New York._ - - -=WILLIAMS OF WEST POINT.= _Illustrated. 12mo. $1.50._ - -By Lieut. HUGH S. JOHNSON. - -A story of West Point under the old code. “Every boy with red blood in -his veins will pronounce it a corker.”--_The Globe, Boston._ - - -=THE SUBSTITUTE.= _Illustrated. 12mo. $1.50._ - -By WALTER CAMP. - -“Presents the ideal to football enthusiasts. The author’s name is -guarantee of the accuracy of descriptions of the plays.”--_The Courant, -Hartford, Conn._ - - -=THE FOREST RUNNERS.= _Illustrated in Color. 12mo. $1.50._ - -By JOSEPH A. ALTSHELER. - -This story deals with the further adventures of the two young woodsmen -in the history of Kentucky who were heroes in “The Young Trailers.” The -story is full of thrills to appeal to every boy who loves a good story. - - -D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. - - - - - * * * * * * - - - - -Transcriber’s note: - - --Except for the frontispiece, illustrations have been moved to the - text that they illustrate, so the page number of the illustration - may not match the page number in the List of Illustrations. - - --Punctuation and spelling inaccuracies were silently corrected. - - --Archaic and variable spelling has been preserved. - - --Variations in hyphenation and compound words have been preserved. - - - -***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AFOOT*** - - -******* This file should be named 50983-0.txt or 50983-0.zip ******* - - -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: -http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/5/0/9/8/50983 - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - |